JP6244328B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  Conventionally, a plurality of reels having a plurality of symbols drawn on the peripheral surface, and a display window for displaying a part of the symbols drawn on the peripheral surfaces of the plurality of reels, the game value such as a medal by the player A gaming machine (a so-called “pachi-slot”) in which symbols are stopped and displayed on the display window by rotating all reels based on the loading operation and starting operation on the start lever, and stopping each reel based on the stop button operation by the player. )It has been known. Such a gaming machine is a player when a predetermined combination of symbols is stopped and displayed on a predetermined line (hereinafter referred to as “effective line”) among symbols displayed on the display window. A privilege (for example, a medal) is given to.

  In addition, such a gaming machine detects the operation of the start lever by the player, extracts a predetermined random number value based on the detection of the operation of the start lever, and extracts the extracted random number value for each winning combination. The winning combination is determined based on the winning combination determination table in which the lottery value is defined, and reel stop control is performed based on the determined winning combination and the stop button operation by the player. Here, depending on the determined winning combination, it may be permitted to display a plurality of symbol combinations on the active line among predetermined symbol combinations.

  At this time, when “losing” is determined as the winning combination, a combination of symbols that can receive a privilege is not displayed regardless of the operation of the stop button at any timing. In addition, if the stop button is not operated at an appropriate timing, the winning combination will not be displayed on the active line in combination with the winning combination, or if the stop button is operated at any timing, There is a winning combination in which such a combination of symbols is stopped and displayed on the active line.

  In other words, if the winning combination is determined as a winning combination that does not stop and display the combination of symbols related to the winning combination unless the stop button is operated at the appropriate timing, the stop operation is performed at the appropriate timing. Since it is necessary to do this, the player is required to have a certain skill regarding the operation of the stop button.

  Further, in such a gaming machine, when a predetermined condition is satisfied in a normal state that is disadvantageous to the player, a state advantageous to the player compared to the normal state (hereinafter referred to as “specific state”). ”) Is performed. Here, the “specific state” is a bonus game in which a probability that a combination of symbols from which medals are paid out (hereinafter referred to as “a combination of symbols related to winning a prize”) is displayed on the active line is improved as compared to the normal state. (“RB (Regular Bonus)”, “BB (Big Bonus)”, “CB (Challenge Bonus)”, “MB (Middle Bonus)”, etc.) If the symbol combination is not displayed (or if the stop button is not operated in the appropriate order, the symbol combination related to the winning combination with the smaller number of medals will be displayed) In addition, “AT (assist time)” that informs the appropriate operation order of the stop button, etc., and operating the start lever without performing the medal insertion operation More re-game the player is started to improve the probability that is determined as a winning combination "RT (replay time)", AT and RT is activated at the same time there is a such as "ART (assisted replay time)". Therefore, the player plays a game while desiring to shift to a specific state advantageous to the player.

  Here, for example, regarding AT and ART which are examples of specific states, it is known that a sub control board that receives a command from a main control board displays operation information of a stop button on a liquid crystal display device (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2014-64832 A

  Here, when displaying the operation information of the stop button on the liquid crystal display device managed by the sub control board, when drawing a large number of images including the operation information of the stop button, or when drawing a so-called 3D image, Since the drawing process may be delayed and, as a result, the operation information of the stop button is displayed with a delay, improvement has been desired.

  Therefore, it is conceivable to provide notifying means for notifying the operation information of the stop button managed on the main control board so as to promptly notify the operation information of the stop button.

  However, since a capacity that can be managed is determined in the main control board, when providing notification means for notifying operation information of a stop button managed in the main control board, a device for reducing the control load is required.

  The present invention has been made in view of such circumstances, and it is an object of the present invention to reduce the control load on the main control board when the operation information on the stop button is notified on the main control board.

In order to solve such a problem, a gaming machine according to the present invention includes a plurality of reels having a plurality of symbols arranged on a peripheral surface, a start operation detecting means for detecting a start operation by a player, and the start operation. A winning combination determining means for determining a winning combination based on the detection of the start operation by the detection means, and the reels based on the detection of the start operation by the start operation detecting means. Reel rotation control means for performing rotation control, stop operation detection means provided for each of the plurality of reels to detect a stop operation by a player, and the stop operation detected by the stop operation detection means And a stop control means for stopping the reels rotated by the reel rotation control means based on the winning combination determined by the winning combination determining means, As a result of stopping all of the plurality of reels by the control means, a determination means for determining whether or not a predetermined symbol combination is displayed, and a determination that the predetermined symbol combination is displayed by the determination means Based on this, when a predetermined winning combination is determined by the gaming value adding means for adding a game value and the winning combination determining means, a combination of predetermined symbols corresponding to the predetermined winning combination is displayed. Control is performed by a specific state control unit that controls a specific state in which information for performing notification is controlled, a main control unit that controls a game, a sub-control unit that controls an effect, and the main control unit The display means capable of displaying the information relating to the winning combination determined by the winning combination determining means and the information relating to the gaming value, and the sub-control means controls The main control means is provided by the winning combination determining means at least when the specific state is controlled by the specific state control means. When the predetermined winning combination is determined, after the start operation is detected by the start operation detection means, and before the reels start to rotate under the control of the reel rotation control means. In addition, the information related to the predetermined winning combination is controlled to be displayed on the display means, and when all of the plurality of reels are stopped, the information related to the predetermined winning combination is not displayed and the determination Based on the determination that the combination of symbols relating to the predetermined winning combination is displayed by the means, information relating to the game value of the predetermined winning combination is displayed on the display means. The winning combination different from the predetermined winning combination is a specific symbol regardless of the timing at which the stop operation is detected by the stop operation detecting means and the order in which the stop operations are detected. And when the specific winning combination to which the gaming value is given is determined by the gaming value granting means, the display means displays information related to the specific winning combination. Instead, the sub-control means performs control to execute the effect by controlling the effect means when the specific winning combination is determined.

  Here, the “predetermined symbol combination” may be any symbol combination as long as it is a predetermined symbol combination. In addition, the number of predetermined symbol combinations may be any number.

  As the “game value”, medals, coins, game balls, game point data, tokens, and the like can be applied.

  The “predetermined winning combination” may be any winning combination as long as it is a predetermined winning combination.

  The “predetermined symbol combination” may be any symbol combination as long as it is a symbol combination displayed on the active line when a predetermined winning combination is won.

  The “specific state” may be any state as long as information for displaying a predetermined symbol combination is notified when a predetermined winning combination is won. For example, AT or ART can be applied. In addition, when a predetermined winning combination is won, if the information for displaying a predetermined combination of symbols is informed, RB (first type special combination), BB (first type special combination) It is also possible to apply an accessory continuous action device), CB (type 2 special accessory), MB (type continuous action device related to type 2 special accessory), SB (ordinary accessory), and the like.

  In addition, “production” refers to, for example, displaying an image on a liquid crystal display device, outputting sound from a speaker, emitting an LED, moving a production device, or a combination thereof. be able to.

  The “specific symbol combination” may be any symbol combination as long as it is a predetermined symbol combination. For example, the same symbol combination as the predetermined symbol combination may be used, or a symbol combination different from the predetermined symbol combination may be used.

  Further, the “specific winning combination” is a predetermined winning combination and may be any winning combination as long as it is a winning combination different from the predetermined winning combination.

  The display means displays the amount of game value given by the game value giving means, and the main control means displays information related to the predetermined winning combination at a timing different from the timing for displaying the game value amount. It is good also as performing control to do.

  According to the present invention, the control load on the main control board can be reduced when the operation information on the stop button is notified on the main control board.

It is a figure which shows an example of the external appearance perspective view of a game machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal structure of a cabinet, and the back surface of a front door. It is a figure which shows an example of the block diagram of the whole gaming machine. It is a figure which shows an example of each name of the payout number display. It is a figure which shows an example of an arrangement | sequence data table. It is a figure which shows an example of a symbol combination table. It is a figure which shows an example of the relationship of a winning combination, the operation order of a stop button, and winning a prize. It is a figure which shows an example of the 1st RT gaming state winning combination determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of the 2nd RT gaming state winning combination determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of the 3RT gaming state winning combination determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of the 4RT gaming state winning combination determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of the winning combination determination table for RB gaming states. It is a figure which shows an example of a game state transition diagram. It is a figure which shows an example of the transition diagram of the state managed by the main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of an ART preparation state transfer lottery table. It is a figure which shows an example of an addition lottery table. It is a figure which shows an example of the relationship between a condition apparatus command and instruction information. It is a figure which shows an example of an instruction | indication effect determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of an effect determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of the program start process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the main loop process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process according to the state at the time of a start in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for normal states in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for bonus preparation states in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for BB states in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for RB states in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for ART preparation states in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for ART states in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for bonus preparation states during ART in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for BB state in ART in the main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for RB states during ART in the main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the information setting process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the game state transfer process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process in bonus operation in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process according to the state at the time of a display in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for bonus preparation states at the time of a display in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for BB states at the time of a display in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for RB states at the time of a display in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for ART preparation state at the time of display in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for bonus preparation states during display ART in the main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of a process for BB state during ART at the time of display in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for RB states during ART at the time of a display in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the interruption process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the LED display process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the LED data creation process for instruction information display in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the main process in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the main control board communication process in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the command analysis process in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows the 1st specific example of the timing chart which shows the transmission start timing of an instruction | indication information command, and the display start timing of a payout number display apparatus and a liquid crystal display device. It is a figure which shows the 2nd specific example of the timing chart which shows the transmission start timing of an instruction | indication information command, and the display start timing of a payout number display apparatus and a liquid crystal display device. It is a figure which shows the 3rd specific example of the timing chart which shows the transmission start timing of an instruction information command, and the display start timing of a payout number display apparatus and a liquid crystal display device. It is a figure which shows the 4th specific example of the timing chart which shows the transmission start timing of an instruction information command, and the display start timing of a payout number indicator and a liquid crystal display device. It is a figure which shows the 1st specific example of the display mode of a payout number display and a liquid crystal display device. It is a figure which shows the 2nd specific example of the display mode of a payout number display and a liquid crystal display device. It is a figure which shows the 3rd specific example of the display mode of a payout number display and a liquid crystal display device. It is a figure which shows the 4th specific example of the display mode of a payout number display and a liquid crystal display device. It is a figure which shows the 5th example of a display mode of a payout number display and a liquid crystal display device. It is a figure which shows an example of the relationship between ID, the operation order, and the display mode of the payout number display. It is a figure which shows an example of the relationship between instruction content, ID, and the display mode of a payout number display. It is a figure which shows an example of the relationship between an operation order, ID, and the display mode of a payout number display. It is a figure which shows an example of the relationship between a winning number and the display mode of a payout number display. It is a figure which shows the 1st specific example of the relationship between the operation sequence of a stop button, and the display mode of a payout number display. It is a figure which shows the 2nd specific example of the relationship between the operation sequence of a stop button, and the display mode of a payout number display. It is a figure which shows the 3rd specific example of the relationship between the operation sequence of a stop button, and the display mode of a payout number display. It is a figure which shows an example of the arrangement | sequence data table in 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table in 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the relationship of the winning combination and winning a prize in 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the 1st RT gaming state winning combination determination table in 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the 2nd RT gaming state winning combination determination table in 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the winning combination determination table for RB gaming states in 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the relationship between the condition apparatus command and instruction information in 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the instruction | indication effect determination table in 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the LED data creation process for instruction information display in 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the relationship between the condition apparatus command and instruction information in 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the information setting process in 3rd Embodiment.

  Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be specifically described with reference to the drawings.

(Composition of gaming machine)
First, the configuration of the gaming machine 1 in the present invention will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. 1 and 2. FIG. 1 is a diagram showing an external perspective view of the gaming machine, and FIG. 2 is a diagram showing the internal structure of the cabinet and the back surface of the front door.

(Game machine 1)
The gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment includes a cabinet 2 described later, a front door 3 and the like.

(Cabinet 2)
The cabinet 2 is a substantially rectangular box and has an opening on the front side. A plurality of components are attached to the cabinet 2.

(Front door 3)
The front door 3 is attached so as to close the opening on the front side of the cabinet 2. A plurality of components are attached to the front door 3.

(Hinge mechanism 4)
The hinge mechanism 4 is provided on the left side of the cabinet 2 as viewed from the front, and is provided to pivotally support the front door 3 so that it can be opened and closed.

(Keyhole 5)
The keyhole 5 is provided at the center right side of the front door 3 and is provided for unlocking the front door 3 by a locking device (not shown). Here, when a store clerk or the like of a game store performs a maintenance operation or a change of a set value indicating a degree advantageous to the player, the unlocking device (not shown) provided on the front door 3 is unlocked. Done. Specifically, the door is unlocked by inserting a door key (not shown) into the keyhole 5 and rotating it by a predetermined angle in the clockwise direction. Then, the front door 3 is opened, and maintenance work and work such as setting value change are performed. In addition, when the maintenance work and the work such as the change of the set value are finished, the front door 3 is closed and the door is locked.

(Medal slot 6)
The medal slot 6 is provided on the upper left side of the keyhole 5 when viewed from the front, and is provided for a player to insert a medal.

(BET button 7)
The BET button 7 is provided on the left side of the medal insertion slot 6 when viewed from the front, and is provided for using “1” medals among the stored medals in the game.

(MAXBET button 8)
The MAXBET button 8 is provided on the right side of the BET button 7 when viewed from the front, and is provided to use the maximum number of medals that can be used in one game ("1" game) among the stored (credit) medals. It has been. Here, in this embodiment, the maximum value of medals that can be used in one game is “3”.

(Checkout button 9)
The settlement button 9 is provided on the back side of the BET button 7 and is provided for settlement of medals stored (credited) among medals acquired by the player. In the present embodiment, the maximum value of medals that can be stored (credited) is “50”.

(Start lever 10)
The start lever 10 is provided below the BET button 7. The start lever 10 is provided for the player to perform a start operation that triggers the rotation of the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 described later. Here, based on the detection of the start operation by the player, the main control board 300 (to be described later) acquires a random number value and determines the winning combination, the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right to be described later. A process for starting the rotation of the reel 20 is performed.

(Left stop button 11)
The left stop button 11 is provided on the right side of the start lever 10 in front view. The left stop button 11 is provided to detect a stop operation that triggers stopping rotation of the left reel 18 described later.

(Intermediate stop button 12)
The middle stop button 12 is provided on the right side of the left stop button 11 when viewed from the front. Further, the middle stop button 12 is provided to detect a stop operation that triggers stopping the rotation of the middle reel 19 described later.

(Right stop button 13)
The right stop button 13 is provided on the right side of the middle stop button 12 when viewed from the front. The right stop button 13 is provided to detect a stop operation that triggers stopping the rotation of the right reel 20 described later.

(Selector 14)
The selector 14 is provided on the back side of the front door 3. The selector 14 is provided to determine whether or not the material or shape of the medal inserted into the medal insertion slot 6 is appropriate.

(Storage number indicator 15)
The stored number display 15 is provided on the right side of the settlement button 9 when viewed from the front. The stored number display 15 is provided to display the number of stored medal (credit) of the player stored (credited) in the gaming machine 1. Here, in the present embodiment, the stored number indicator 15 is configured by a “7-segment LED (seven segment display)”.

(Payout number display 16)
The payout number display 16 is provided on the right side of the stored number display 15 in front view. The payout number display 16 displays the number of medals to be paid out to the player, or displays that the game machine 1 is in an error state when the game machine 1 is in an error state. Is provided. Here, in the present embodiment, the payout number display 16 is constituted by a “7-segment LED (seven segment display)”.

(Door open / close sensor 17s)
The door opening / closing sensor 17s is provided on the back side of the keyhole 5, and is provided to detect whether or not the front door 3 is open. The door opening / closing sensor 17s includes a light emitting portion and a light receiving portion. When a door key (not shown) is inserted into the keyhole 5 and the door key (not shown) is rotated clockwise by a predetermined angle, the door opening / closing sensor 17s is locked. The part (not shown) will rotate. And the light-receiving part cannot receive the light emitted from the light-emitting part when the locking part rotates. Thereby, the door open / close sensor 17s detects the opening of the front door 3.

(Left reel 18)
The left reel 18 is provided inside the cabinet 2 and has a cylindrical structure. Further, a translucent sheet is mounted on the peripheral surface of the cylindrical structure of the left reel 18, and a plurality of types of symbols are drawn in a row on the sheet. The left reel 18 is rotationally driven by a left stepping motor 151 described later, and a plurality of types of symbols are variably displayed.

(Middle reel 19)
The middle reel 19 is provided inside the cabinet 2 and has a cylindrical structure. Further, a translucent sheet is mounted on the peripheral surface of the cylindrical structure of the middle reel 19, and a plurality of types of symbols are drawn in a row on the sheet. The middle reel 19 is driven to rotate by a middle stepping motor 152, which will be described later, and a plurality of types of symbols are variably displayed.

(Right reel 20)
The right reel 20 is provided inside the cabinet 2 and has a cylindrical structure. In addition, a translucent sheet is mounted on the peripheral surface of the cylindrical structure of the right reel 20, and a plurality of types of symbols are drawn in a row on the sheet. The right reel 20 is rotationally driven by a right stepping motor 153, which will be described later, and a plurality of types of symbols are variably displayed.

(Direction button 21)
The effect button 21 is provided on the right side of the MAXBET button 8 when viewed from the front, and is provided for the player to operate at a predetermined timing. Here, the sub control board 400 described later performs display control of the liquid crystal display device 31 described later via the effect control board 500 described later when the operation of the effect button 21 is detected.

(Cross key 22)
The cross key 22 is provided on the right side of the effect button 21 when viewed from the front, and includes an up button, a down button, a left button, and a right button, and is provided for the player to operate at a predetermined timing. It has been. Then, the sub control board 400 described later performs display control of the liquid crystal display device 31 and the like described later via the effect control board 500 described later when the operation of the cross key 22 is detected.

(Display window 23)
The display window 23 is provided on the front side of the left reel 18, middle reel 19, and right reel 20, and a plurality of symbols drawn on the peripheral surfaces of the left reel 18, middle reel 19, and right reel 20 can be visually recognized. Is provided to do. Specifically, “3” symbols drawn on the peripheral surface of the left reel 18, “3” symbols drawn on the peripheral surface of the middle reel 19, and drawn on the peripheral surface of the right reel 20. A total of “9” symbols of “3” symbols can be viewed through the display window 23. In the present embodiment, in order to facilitate the visual recognition of the symbols displayed on the display window 23, the symbols displayed on the display window 23 are irradiated by emitting a backlight (not shown). .

(Effective line)
Here, in the present embodiment, among the symbols displayed on the display window 23, the effective line is a symbol displayed on the upper stage of the left reel 18, a symbol displayed on the middle stage of the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20. “Right-down line” connecting the symbols displayed in the lower row with a straight line, the symbols displayed in the upper row of the left reel 18, the symbols displayed in the upper row of the middle reel 19, and the upper row of the right reel 20. The “upper line” connecting the displayed symbols with a straight line, the symbol displayed in the middle of the left reel 18, the symbol displayed in the middle of the middle reel 19, and the symbol displayed in the middle of the right reel 20 The “middle line” connected at the right, the symbol displayed at the lower part of the left reel 18, the symbol displayed at the middle part of the middle reel 19, and the symbol displayed at the upper part of the right reel 20 with a straight line “right” "4" lies in total It becomes effective line.

(Tray unit 24)
The saucer unit 24 is provided below the front face of the front door 3. In addition, the tray unit 24 is provided for receiving and storing medals discharged from a medal payout opening 25 described later.

(Medal payout exit 25)
The medal payout opening 25 is provided below the front door 3 and is provided for discharging a medal paid out by a hopper 202 described later when the medal payout is performed. The medal payout opening 25 is inserted when the medal inserted into the medal slot 6 is not an appropriate medal by the selector sensor 14s or when the medal insertion cannot be accepted. It is provided for discharging the medal inserted into the medal slot 6 when a medal is inserted into the slot 6.

(First BET lamp 26)
The first BET lamp 26 is provided on the left side as viewed from the front of the stored number indicator 15 and is provided to notify that the BET number is “1”. Specifically, the main control board 300 to be described later is configured to bet the BET when “1” or more medals are inserted into the medal insertion slot 6 or when “1” or more medals are stored (credit). For example, when the button 7 or the MAXBET button 8 is operated, the first BET lamp 26 is turned on. In the present embodiment, the first BET lamp 26 is connected to a status board 100 described later, and is configured by an LED.

(Second BET lamp 27)
The second BET lamp 27 is provided above the first BET lamp 26 and is provided to notify that the BET number is “2”. Specifically, the main control board 300 to be described later is a BET in a case where “2” or more medals are inserted into the medal slot 6 or in a state where “2” or more medals are stored (credit). For example, when the button 7 is operated “2” times, the second BET lamp 27 is turned on. In the present embodiment, the second BET lamp 27 is connected to a status board 100 described later, and is configured by an LED.

(3rd BET lamp 28)
The third BET lamp 28 is provided above the second BET lamp 27 and is provided to notify that the BET number is “3”. Specifically, the main control board 300 described later has a MAXBET button when “3” medals are inserted into the medal insertion slot 6 or in a state where “3” or more medals are stored (credit). When No. 8 is operated, a process of turning on the third BET lamp 28 is performed when a “combination of symbols relating to replay” described later is displayed on the active line in the previous game. In the present embodiment, the third BET lamp 28 is connected to a status board 100, which will be described later, and is composed of LEDs.

(Liquid crystal display device 31)
The liquid crystal display device 31 is provided above the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20, and is provided for displaying moving images, still images, and the like. Here, the sub-control board 400 to be described later, when a state managed by the main control board 300 to be described later is an “ART state” to be described later, “push order bell A” and “push order” by an internal lottery process to be described later. When any one of “Bell B”, “Push Order Bell C”, “Push Order Bell D”, and “Push Order Bell E” is determined, the left stop button 11, Processing for displaying the operation order of the middle stop button 12 and the right stop button 13 on the liquid crystal display device 31 is performed. For example, when “push order bell A” is won, the operation order indicating that the left stop button 11 is operated first, the middle stop button 12 is operated next, and the right stop button 13 is operated last is shown. It is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 31. In the following description, the operation order of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 may be referred to as “operation order”.

(LED32)
The LED 32 is provided on the peripheral edge of the front surface of the front door 3 and is designed and designed with a shape, color, pattern, pattern, etc. appealing to the player's vision. Here, the below-described sub control board 400 performs an effect of visually appealing to the player by performing a process of turning on and blinking the LED 32.

(Speaker 33)
The speaker 33 is provided below the back side of the front door 3 and is provided for outputting BGM, sound, sound effects, etc. when performing an effect. Here, the below-described sub control board 400 performs a process of outputting sound from the speaker 33, thereby performing an effect appealing to the player.

(Status board 100)
The status board 100 is provided on the back side of the front door 3 and below the display window 23. The status board 100 also includes a BET switch 7sw described later, a MAXBET switch 8sw described later, a settlement switch 9sw described later, a start switch 10sw described later, a left stop switch 11sw described later, a middle stop switch 12sw described later, and a right stop described later. A switch 13sw, a selector sensor 14s described later, a stored number display 15, a payout number display 16, a door open / close sensor 17s, and a main control board 300 described later are connected.

(Reel control board 150)
The reel control board 150 is provided above the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20, and is provided to control the rotation and stop of the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20. . The reel control board 150 includes a left stepping motor 151 to be described later, a middle stepping motor 152 to be described later, a right stepping motor 153 to be described later, a left reel sensor 154s to be described later, a middle reel sensor 155s to be described later, and a right reel sensor 156s to be described later. And a main control board 300 to be described later are connected.

(Power supply board 200)
The power supply board 200 is provided inside the cabinet 2 on the left side when viewed from the front, and is provided for performing control for supplying power to the gaming machine 1. The power supply board 200 is connected to a power switch 201sw described later, a hopper 202 described later, a main control board 300, and a sub control board 400 described later.

(Power button 201)
The power button 201 is provided on the left side of a front view of a hopper 202 described later, and is provided for performing an operation of supplying power to the gaming machine 1.

(Hopper 202)
The hopper 202 is provided on the right side of the power supply board 200 as viewed from the front, and is provided for paying out medals to the player. Here, the main control board 300, which will be described later, performs a process of driving the hopper 202 via the power supply board 200 when a combination of symbols for paying out medals is displayed on the active line, and gives a medal to the player. Process to pay out.

(Main control board 300)
The main control board 300 is provided inside the cabinet 2 and above the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20, and is provided for controlling the gaming machine 1. The main control board 300 includes a main CPU 301 described later, a main ROM 302 described later, a main RAM 303 described later, and a main random number generator 304 described later. Further, the external control terminal board 30, the status board 100, the reel control board 150, the power supply board 200, and the sub control board 400, which will be described later, are connected to the main control board 300.

(Sub control board 400)
The sub-control board 400 is provided on the left side of the main control board 300 when viewed from the front, and is provided mainly for controlling the production. The sub control board 400 includes a sub CPU 401 described later, a sub ROM 402 described later, a sub RAM 403 described later, and a sub random number generator 404 described later. Furthermore, a later-described effect button sensor 21s, a later-described cross key sensor 22s, a power supply board 200, a main control board 300, and a later-described effect control board 500 are connected to the sub-control board 400.

(Production control board 500)
The effect control board 500 is provided above the back surface of the front door 3 and is provided mainly for executing an effect. The effect control board 500 includes an effect control CPU 501 described later, an effect control ROM 502 described later, an effect control RAM 503 described later, a CGROM 504 described later, a sound source IC 505 described later, a sound source ROM 506 described later, and a VDP 507 described later. Further, the liquid crystal display device 31, the LED 32, the speaker 33, and the sub control board 400 are connected to the effect control board 500.

(Block diagram of the entire gaming machine)
Next, a block diagram of the entire gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG.

  In the gaming machine 1, a status board 100, a reel control board 150, a power supply board 200, and a sub control board 400 are connected to a main control board 300 that controls main operations of the gaming machine 1.

(BET switch 7sw)
The BET switch 7sw is a switch for detecting the operation of the BET button 7. Here, the status board 100 transmits a BET switch input signal to the main control board 300 when an operation of the BET button 7 is detected by the BET switch 7sw. Then, based on the reception of the BET switch input signal from the status board 100, the main control board 300 performs a process of using “1” medals from the stored medals.

(MAXBET switch 8sw)
The MAXBET switch 8sw is a switch for detecting the operation of the MAXBET button 8. Here, the status board 100 transmits a MAXBET switch input signal to the main control board 300 when the operation of the MAXBET button 8 is detected by the MAXBET switch 8sw. Then, based on the reception of the MAXBET switch input signal from the status board 100, the main control board 300 performs a process of using “3” medals from the stored medals.

(Settlement switch 9sw)
The settlement switch 9sw is a switch for detecting the operation of the settlement button 9. Here, the status board 100 transmits a settlement switch input signal to the main control board 300 when an operation of the settlement button 9 is detected by the settlement switch 9sw. Then, the main control board 300 performs a process of adjusting the stored medals based on the reception of the adjustment switch input signal from the status board 100.

(Start switch 10sw)
The start switch 10sw is a switch for detecting the operation of the start lever 10. Here, the status board 100 transmits a start switch input signal to the main control board 300 when an operation of the start lever 10 is detected by the start switch 10sw. The main control board 300 performs processing for starting rotation of the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 based on the reception of the start switch input signal from the status board 100.

(Left stop switch 11sw)
The left stop switch 11sw is a switch for detecting an operation of the left stop button 11. Here, the status board 100 transmits a left stop switch input signal to the main control board 300 when an operation of the left stop button 11 is detected by the left stop switch 11sw. The main control board 300 performs a process of stopping the rotating left reel 18 based on the reception of the left stop switch input signal from the status board 100.

(Intermediate stop switch 12sw)
The middle stop switch 12sw is a switch for detecting the operation of the middle stop button 12. Here, the status board 100 transmits an intermediate stop switch input signal to the main control board 300 when the operation of the intermediate stop button 12 is detected by the intermediate stop switch 12sw. The main control board 300 performs a process of stopping the rotating middle reel 19 based on the reception of the middle stop switch input signal from the status board 100.

(Right stop switch 13sw)
The right stop switch 13sw is a switch for detecting the operation of the right stop button 13. Here, the status board 100 transmits a right stop switch input signal to the main control board 300 when the operation of the right stop button 13 is detected by the right stop switch 13sw. Then, the main control board 300 performs processing for stopping the rotating right reel 20 based on the reception of the right stop switch input signal from the status board 100.

(Selector sensor 14s)
The selector sensor 14 s is a sensor for detecting that an appropriate medal is inserted into the medal insertion slot 6. Here, the status board 100 transmits a selector sensor input signal to the main control board 300 when an appropriate medal passage is detected by the selector sensor 14s. Then, the main control board 300 receives the selector sensor input signal from the status board 100, and adds “1” to the number of medals to be stored (credited) or the number of medals used in the game. A process of adding “1” is performed.

(Left stepping motor 151)
The left stepping motor 151 is provided inside the left reel 18 and is provided for controlling the left reel 18. The left stepping motor 151 has a configuration capable of stopping the rotation shaft at a specified angle. As a result, the left reel 18 rotates at a constant angle each time a pulse signal is output to the left stepping motor 151. The main control board 300 manages the rotation angle of the left reel 18 by counting the number of times a pulse signal is output to the left stepping motor 151 after a reel index is detected by a left reel sensor 154s described later. .

(Medium stepping motor 152)
The middle stepping motor 152 is provided inside the middle reel 19 and is provided for controlling the middle reel 19. Further, the middle stepping motor 152 has a configuration capable of stopping the rotation axis at a specified angle. As a result, the intermediate reel 19 rotates at a constant angle each time a pulse signal is output to the intermediate stepping motor 152. The main control board 300 manages the rotation angle of the middle reel 19 by counting the number of times a pulse signal is output to the middle stepping motor 152 after the reel index is detected by the middle reel sensor 155s described later. .

(Right stepping motor 153)
The right stepping motor 153 is provided inside the right reel 20 and is provided for controlling the right reel 20. The right stepping motor 153 has a configuration capable of stopping the rotation shaft at a specified angle. As a result, the right reel 20 rotates at a constant angle each time a pulse signal is output to the right stepping motor 153. The main control board 300 manages the rotation angle of the right reel 20 by counting the number of times a pulse signal is output to the right stepping motor 153 after a reel index is detected by a right reel sensor 156s described later. .

(Left reel sensor 154s)
The left reel sensor 154s is provided inside the left reel 18, and includes an optical sensor having a light emitting part and a light receiving part. The left reel sensor 154s is provided to detect a reel index indicating that the left reel 18 has rotated “1”.

(Medium reel sensor 155s)
The middle reel sensor 155s is provided inside the middle reel 19, and includes an optical sensor having a light emitting part and a light receiving part. The middle reel sensor 155s is provided to detect a reel index indicating that the middle reel 19 has rotated “1”.

(Right reel sensor 156s)
The right reel sensor 156s is provided inside the right reel 20, and includes an optical sensor having a light emitting part and a light receiving part. The right reel sensor 156s is provided to detect a reel index indicating that the right reel 20 has rotated “1”.

(Power switch 201sw)
The power switch 201sw is a switch for detecting an operation of the power button 201. Here, the power supply board 200 performs a process of supplying power to the gaming machine 1 when the operation of the power button 201 is detected by the power switch 201sw.

(Hopper sensor 202s)
The hopper sensor 202s is a sensor for detecting that a medal to be paid out by driving the hopper 202 has passed. Here, the power supply board 200 transmits a hopper sensor input signal to the main control board 300 when the hopper sensor 202s detects the payout of medals. Then, the main control board 300 performs a process of subtracting the payout number based on the reception of the hopper sensor input signal from the status board 100.

(External concentration terminal board 30)
The external concentrated terminal board 30 is managed by the main control board 300, a medal insertion signal that can specify the number of medals used in the game, a medal payout signal that can specify the number of medals paid out to the player, An ART signal that can specify that the state has shifted to the “ART state” described later, a BB signal that can specify that a combination of symbols related to BB described later is displayed, and a combination of symbols related to RB described later are displayed It is provided to transmit an RB signal that can identify the fact and a security signal that can identify that an illegal act has been performed to the outside of the gaming machine 1 such as a hall computer (not shown).

(Main CPU 301)
The main CPU 301 is provided on the main control board 300. Further, the main CPU 301 reads a program stored in a main ROM 302, which will be described later, and performs a predetermined arithmetic process in accordance with the progress of the game, so that the status board 100, the reel control board 150, the power board 200, and the sub control board. A predetermined signal is transmitted to 400.

(Main ROM 302)
The main ROM 302 is provided on the main control board 300. The main ROM 302 is provided for storing a control program executed by the main CPU 301, a data table, data for transmitting a command to the sub control board 400, and the like. Specifically, the main ROM 302 includes an array data table (see FIG. 5) to be described later, a symbol combination table (see FIG. 6) to be described later, a first RT game state winning combination determination table (see FIG. 8) to be described later, Second RT gaming state winning combination determination table (see FIG. 9), later described third RT gaming state winning combination determination table (see FIG. 10), later described fourth RT gaming state winning combination determination table (see FIG. 11), later described. RB gaming state winning combination determination table (see FIG. 12), an ART preparation state transition lottery table (see FIG. 15) described later, an additional lottery table (see FIG. 16) described later, and the like.

(Main RAM 303)
The main RAM 303 is provided on the main control board 300. The main RAM 303 is provided for storing various data determined by the execution of the program by the main CPU 301. Specifically, the main RAM 303 is provided with various counters such as a later-described input number counter and various storage areas such as a setting value storage area described later.

(Main random number generator 304)
The main random number generator 304 is provided on the main control board 300. The main random number generator 304 is provided for generating a random value used in a lottery or the like for determining a winning combination. Here, in the present embodiment, the main random number generator 304 generates a random number value in the range of “0” to “65535”.

(Production button sensor 21s)
The effect button sensor 21 s is connected to the effect button 21 and is provided to detect an operation of the effect button 21. Here, the effect button sensor 21 s transmits an effect button sensor input signal to the sub control board 400 based on the detection of the operation of the effect button 21. Then, the sub control board 400 performs processing when the effect button 21 is operated based on the reception of the effect button sensor input signal.

(Cross key sensor 22s)
The cross key sensor 22 s is connected to the cross key 22 and is provided to detect an operation of the cross key 22. Here, the cross key sensor 22 s transmits a cross key sensor input signal to the sub-control board 400 based on detecting the operation of the cross key 22. Then, the sub-control board 400 performs processing when the cross key 22 is operated based on the reception of the cross key sensor input signal.

(Sub CPU 401)
The sub CPU 401 is provided on the sub control board 400. Further, the sub CPU 401 reads a program stored in a sub ROM 402 described later, and performs predetermined processing based on command information received from the main control board 300 and signals input from the effect button sensor 21s and the cross key sensor 22s. It is provided for performing calculations and supplying the results of the calculations to the effect control board 500 and the like.

(Sub ROM 402)
The sub ROM 402 is provided on the sub control board 400. The sub ROM 402 is provided for storing a control program executed by the sub CPU 401, a data table, and the like. Specifically, the sub ROM 402 stores an effect determination table (see FIG. 19) described later.

(Sub RAM 403)
The sub RAM 403 is provided on the sub control board 400. The sub RAM 403 is provided for storing various data determined by the execution of the program by the sub CPU 401.

(Sub-random number generator 404)
The sub random number generator 404 is provided on the sub control board 400. The sub-random number generator 404 is provided for generating a random value used in a lottery or the like for determining the production. Here, in the present embodiment, the sub-random number generator 404 generates a random value in the range of “0” to “65535”.

(Production control CPU 501)
The effect control CPU 501 is provided on the effect control board 500. The effect control CPU 501 is provided to read a program stored in an effect control ROM 502 described later and create a display list based on a signal received from the sub control board 400. The effect control CPU 501 performs control for causing the liquid crystal display device 31 to display image data stored in a CGROM 504 described later.

(Production control ROM 502)
The effect control ROM 502 is provided on the effect control board 500. The effect control ROM 502 is provided for storing a control program executed by the effect control CPU 501, a data table, and the like. Specifically, the effect control ROM 502 is a program for control processing of the effect control CPU 501, a display list generation program for generating a display list, a combination of animation scenes that are referred to when displaying animations, and a display order of animation scenes. A weight frame indicating an image display time, various target data such as a sprite identification number and a transfer source address, various parameters such as a sprite display position and a transfer destination address, a drawing method, and the like are stored.

(Production control RAM 503)
The effect control RAM 503 is provided on the effect control board 500. The effect control RAM 503 functions as a data work area during the calculation process of the effect control CPU 501, and is provided for temporarily storing data read from the effect control ROM 502.

(CGROM504)
The CGROM 504 is provided on the effect control board 500. The CGROM 504 includes color number information that specifies a color number for each pixel in a predetermined range of pixels (for example, “32” pixels × “32” pixels), and an α value that indicates the transparency of the image. It is provided for compressing and storing image data comprising a set.

(Sound source IC505)
The sound source IC 505 is provided on the effect control board 500. The sound source IC 505 is provided for reading a program and data relating to sound stored in a sound source ROM 506, which will be described later, and generating a sound signal for driving the speaker 33.

(Sound source ROM 506)
The sound source ROM 506 is provided on the effect control board 500. Further, the sound source ROM 506 is provided for storing a program, data, and the like related to a sound output when an effect is executed.

(VDP507)
The VDP 507 is a so-called image processor, and controls to read image data from the “display frame buffer area” out of the first frame buffer area and the second frame buffer area based on an instruction from the effect control CPU 501. Then, control for displaying an image on the liquid crystal display device 31 is performed by generating a video signal (for example, LVDS signal or RGB signal) based on the read image data. The VDP 507 includes a control register (not shown), a CG bus interface, a CPU interface, a clock generation circuit, an expansion circuit, a drawing circuit, a display circuit, a memory controller, and the like, which are connected by a bus.

(Each name of the payout number display)
Next, each name of the payout number display 16 will be described with reference to FIG.

  The payout number display 16 includes a first segment 16a, a second segment 16b, a third segment 16c, a fourth segment 16d, a fifth segment 16e, a sixth segment 16f, a seventh segment 16g, 8 segment 16h, 9th segment 16i, 10th segment 16j, 11th segment 16k, 12th segment 16l, 13th segment 16m, 14th segment 16n, 15th segment 16o, 16th segment 16p.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the main control board 300 performs control to display a decimal value on the payout number display 16. Thereby, the payout number display 16 can display values from “0” to “99”. For example, when “1” is displayed on the payout number display 16, the main control board 300 performs control to turn on the tenth segment 16j and the eleventh segment 16k.

  Further, the main control board 300 may perform control for displaying a binary value on the payout number display 16. Here, when a binary value is displayed on the payout number display 16, the first segment 16a corresponds to the "0th bit", the second segment 16b corresponds to the "first bit", and the third segment The segment 16c corresponds to the “second bit”, the fourth segment 16d corresponds to the “third bit”, the fifth segment 16e corresponds to the “fourth bit”, and the sixth segment 16f corresponds to the “fifth bit”. The seventh segment 16g corresponds to the “sixth bit”, the eighth segment 16h corresponds to the “seventh bit”, the ninth segment 16i corresponds to the “eighth bit”, and the tenth segment 16j Corresponds to “9th bit”, 11th segment 16k corresponds to “10th bit”, 12th segment 16l corresponds to “11th bit”, 13th segment 16m corresponds to “12th bit” The 14th segment 16n corresponds to the “13th bit”, and the 15th segment 16o corresponds to the “14th bit”. It corresponds to "16-segment 16p corresponds to the" 15th bit ". As a result, values from “0” to “65535” can be displayed. For example, when “1” is displayed on the payout number display 16, the main control board 300 performs control to turn on the first segment 16 a of the payout number display 16.

  The main control board 300 may perform control to display a hexadecimal value on the payout number display 16. Thereby, the values “0” to “FF (255)” can be displayed. Here, when displaying a hexadecimal value on the payout number display 16, when displaying “8” on the payout number display 16, the main control board 300 displays the ninth segment 10 i, the tenth segment 16 j, and so on. The 11th segment 16k, the 12th segment 16l, the 13th segment 16m, the 14th segment 16n, and the 15th segment 16o are controlled to be turned on. When displaying “B” on the payout number display 16, the main control board 300 displays the ninth segment 16i, the tenth segment 16j, the eleventh segment 16k, the twelfth segment 16l, and the thirteenth segment 16m. Then, control is performed to turn on the 14th segment 16n, the 15th segment 16o, and the 16th segment 16p. That is, by distinguishing and displaying “8” and “B” depending on whether or not the 16th segment 16p is turned on, “8” is displayed on the payout number display 16 and the payout number display 16 is displayed. The player is not confused with the display of “B”.

  When displaying a hexadecimal value on the payout number display 16, when displaying “0” on the payout number display 16, the main control board 300 includes the ninth segment 10 i, the tenth segment 16 j, Control is performed to turn on the 11th segment 16k, the 12th segment 16l, the 13th segment 16m, and the 14th segment 16n. When displaying “D” on the payout number display 16, the main control board 300 displays the ninth segment 16i, the tenth segment 16j, the eleventh segment 16k, the twelfth segment 16l, and the thirteenth segment 16m. And the control which lights the 14th segment 16n and the 16th segment 16p is performed. That is, by distinguishing “0” and “D” depending on whether or not the 16th segment 16p is turned on, “0” is displayed on the payout number display 16 and “D” is displayed on the payout number display 16. The player is not confused with the display of.

(Array data table)
Next, the array data table will be described with reference to FIG.

  The arrangement data table is provided in the main ROM 302, and the symbol position of the symbol displayed in the middle of the display window 23 when the left reel sensor 154s, the middle reel sensor 155s, and the right reel sensor 156s detect the reel index. Is defined as “00”. Also, symbol positions “00” to “20” are defined based on the symbol position “00”.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the array data table includes “a symbol related to red seven”, “a symbol related to black seven”, “a symbol related to BAR”, “a symbol related to blank”, and “a plum”. , “Cherry design”, “Watermelon design”, “Bell A design”, “Bell B design”, and “Replay design”. ing.

  Further, in the present embodiment, it is possible to draw from the symbol position at the timing when the left stop switch 11sw, the middle stop switch 12sw, and the right stop switch 13sw detect the stop operation by the player to the symbol ahead of “4” frames. For example, when the symbol position of the left reel 18 is “11”, the symbol position “07” ahead of “4” frame can be drawn to “symbol related to watermelon”.

(Design combination table)
Next, the symbol combination table will be described with reference to FIG.

  The symbol combination table is stored in the main ROM 302, and defines the symbol bit name, symbol combination name, symbol combination, and the number of medals to be paid out to the player.

  Here, when the symbol combination displayed along the active line matches the symbol combination specified in the symbol combination table, the medal payout, the re-game operation, the bonus operation, the gaming state Control which grants the privilege of transfer is performed. If the symbol combination displayed along the active line does not match the symbol combination defined in the symbol combination table, the game is “lost”.

  In the symbol combination table, “Red Seven BB” of symbol bit name “BNS01”, “Black Seven BB” of symbol bit name “BNS02”, “Red Seven RB” of symbol bit name “BNS03”, Symbol bit name “BNS04” “Black Seven RB”, symbol bit name “REP01” “general replay”, symbol bit name “REP02” “first RT gaming state transition replay”, symbol bit name “REP03” “Second RT gaming state transition replay”, symbol bit name “REP04” “third RT gaming state transition replay”, symbol bit name “REP05” “special replay”, symbol bit name “NML01” “watermelon” ”,“ First bell ”of symbol bit name“ NML02 ”,“ second bell ”of symbol bit name“ NML03 ” The symbol bit name “NML04” “third bell”, the symbol bit name “NML05” “fourth bell”, the symbol bit name “NML06” “first cherry”, and the symbol bit name “NML07” “NML07” The “second cherry” and the “chance eye” of the symbol bit name “NML08” are defined.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when “a combination of symbols relating to red seven BB” or “a combination of symbols relating to black seven BB” is displayed on the active line, BB (in the first type special combination) Such an accessory continuous operation device) is operated, and BB is operated. Further, in the present embodiment, when “a combination of symbols related to the red seven RB” or “a combination of symbols related to the black seven RB” is displayed on the active line, an RB (type 1 special bonus) Is operated. When the operation of BB or the operation of RB is performed, it is advantageous for the player as compared to before the operation of BB or the operation of RB is performed.

  In the present embodiment, “a combination of symbols related to Red Seven BB” and “a combination of symbols related to Black Seven BB” are collectively referred to as “a combination of symbols related to BB”. In addition, “a combination of symbols related to Red Seven RB” and “a combination of symbols related to Black Seven RB” are collectively referred to as “a combination of symbols related to RB”. Further, “the combination of symbols related to BB” and “the combination of symbols related to RB” are collectively referred to as “the combination of symbols related to bonus”.

  In the present embodiment, “combination of symbols related to general replay”, “combination of symbols related to first RT gaming state transition replay”, “combination of symbols related to second RT gaming state transition replay”, “third RT gaming” When the “combination of symbols related to state transition replay” or “combination of symbols related to special replay” is displayed on the active line, the replay is activated. When the re-game operation is performed, the game can be performed without inserting medals.

  In this embodiment, “a combination of symbols related to the general replay”, “a combination of symbols related to the first RT gaming state transition replay”, “a combination of symbols related to the second RT gaming state transition replay”, and “first “Combination of symbols related to 3RT gaming state transition replay” and “Combination of symbols related to special replay” are collectively referred to as “combination of symbols related to replay”.

  In the present embodiment, “a combination of symbols related to watermelon”, “a combination of symbols related to the first bell”, “a combination of symbols related to the second bell”, “a combination of symbols related to the third bell”, “Combination of symbols related to Bell 4”, “Combination of symbols related to 1st cherry”, “Combination of symbols related to 2nd cherry”, or “Combination of symbols related to chance” is displayed on the active line. In the case of a medals, a medal is paid out.

  In the present embodiment, “a combination of symbols relating to the first bell”, “a combination of symbols relating to the second bell”, “a combination of symbols relating to the third bell”, and “a symbol relating to the fourth bell”. The “combination of symbols” is collectively referred to as “the combination of symbols relating to the bell”, and the “combination of symbols relating to the first cherry” and the “combination of symbols relating to the second cherry” are collectively referred to as “related to the cherry” It is called a “combination of symbols”.

  In the present embodiment, “a combination of symbols related to watermelon”, “a combination of symbols related to the first bell”, “a combination of symbols related to the second bell”, and “a combination of symbols related to the third bell”. "," Combination of symbols related to Bell 4 "," Combination of symbols related to 1st cherry "," Combination of symbols related to 2nd cherry ", and" Combination of symbols related to chance " This is referred to as “a combination of symbols related to winning a prize”.

(Relationship between winning role, stop button operation order, winnings, etc.)
Next, based on FIG. 7, the relationship between the winning combination, the operation order of the stop button, and winnings will be described.

  In FIG. 7, a winning number corresponding to the winning combination, a winning combination, a condition device corresponding to the winning combination, whether or not each game state can be determined as a winning combination, a left stop button 11, a middle stop button 12, The relationship with the combination of the symbols which can be displayed on an active line by the operation order of the right stop button 13 is shown.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 7, the condition device to be operated varies depending on the determined winning combination. For example, when “Replay A during RT1” with a winning number “02” is determined as a winning combination by an internal lottery process to be described later, the conditional devices that are activated are “REP01” and “REP03”. That is, when the winning number “02” “RT1 replay A” is determined as the winning combination, “combination of symbols related to general replay” and “combination of symbols related to second RT gaming state transition replay” are on the effective line. Is allowed to be displayed.

  In this embodiment, even if the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 are operated at the same symbol position, the player operates the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13. Depending on the order, winning combinations with different combinations of symbols on the active line are provided. For example, when “RT2 replay A” with a winning number “06” is determined as a winning combination by an internal lottery process to be described later, the conditional devices that are activated are “REP01” and “REP04”. In this case, when the left stop button 11 is operated for the first time, “a combination of symbols related to the third RT gaming state transition replay” is displayed on the active line. On the other hand, when the middle stop button 12 is operated for the first time or when the right stop button 13 is operated for the first time, a combination of symbols related to “general replay” is displayed on the active line.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the winning combination in which “the combination of symbols related to winning” is aligned depends on the operation order of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 by the player. Is provided. For example, when the “push order bell A” of the winning number “12” is determined as the winning combination by the internal lottery process described later, the condition devices that are activated are “NML02” and “NML05”. In this case, when the left stop button 11 is first operated, then the middle stop button 12 is operated, and then the right stop button 13 is operated last, the “design relating to the bell A” is the middle stage of the middle reel 19. And “9th” (“3” x “3” lines) is displayed on the “Right-down line”, “Middle line”, and “Right-up line”. ) Medals will be paid out. On the other hand, when the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 are operated in another order, the “symbol related to the bell A” stops on the upper stage of the middle reel 19, and the “related to the fourth bell” “Combination of symbols” is displayed only on the “upper line”, and “3” medals are paid out.

  Similarly, when the “push order bell B” of the winning number “13” is determined as the winning combination by the internal lottery process described later, the left stop button 11 is operated first, and then the right stop button 13 is operated. Finally, when the middle stop button 12 is operated, the “symbol relating to the bell A” stops at the middle stage of the middle reel 19, and the “combination of symbols relating to the fourth bell” is set to the “lower right line”, “ "9" ("3" x "3" lines) medals will be paid out displayed on the "middle line" and the "upward line". On the other hand, when the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 are operated in another order, the “symbol related to the bell A” stops on the upper stage of the middle reel 19, and the “related to the fourth bell” “Combination of symbols” is displayed only on the “upper line”, and “3” medals are paid out.

  In addition, when the “push order bell C” of the winning number “14” is determined as the winning combination by the internal lottery process described later, when the middle stop button 12 is operated for the first time, “the symbol related to the bell A” "" Stops at the middle stage of the middle reel 19, and "the combination of symbols relating to the fourth bell" is displayed on the "lower right line", "middle stage line", and "right upward line", and "9" ("3 “Sheets ד 3 ”lines) will be paid out. On the other hand, when the left stop button 11 or the right stop button 13 is first operated, the “symbol related to the bell A” stops at the upper stage of the middle reel 19, and the “combination of symbols related to the fourth bell” is “ Only the “upper line” is displayed, and “3” medals are paid out.

  In addition, when the “push order bell D” of the winning number “15” is determined as the winning combination by the internal lottery process described later, the right stop button 13 is operated first, and then the left stop button 11 is operated. Finally, when the middle stop button 12 is operated, the “symbol relating to the bell A” stops at the middle stage of the middle reel 19, and the “combination of the symbols relating to the fourth bell” is set to the “lower right line”, “middle stage” "9" ("3" x "3" line) medals will be paid out displayed on the "line" and "upward line". On the other hand, when the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 are operated in another order, the “symbol related to the bell A” stops on the upper stage of the middle reel 19, and the “related to the fourth bell” “Combination of symbols” is displayed only on the “upper line”, and “3” medals are paid out.

  Further, when “push order bell E” of the winning number “16” is determined as a winning combination by the internal lottery process described later, the right stop button 13 is operated first, and then the middle stop button 12 is operated. Finally, when the left stop button 11 is operated, the “symbol relating to the bell A” stops at the middle stage of the middle reel 19, and the “combination of the symbols relating to the fourth bell” is set to the “lower right line”, “middle stage” "9" ("3" x "3" line) medals will be paid out displayed on the "line" and "upward line". On the other hand, when the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 are operated in another order, the “symbol related to the bell A” stops on the upper stage of the middle reel 19, and the “related to the fourth bell” “Combination of symbols” is displayed only on the “upper line”, and “3” medals are paid out.

  On the other hand, a winning combination is provided in which the combination of symbols arranged on the active line does not differ regardless of the order of operation of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13. For example, when “red BB” of the winning number “23” is determined as a winning combination by an internal lottery process described later, the condition device that is activated is “BNS01”. In this case, even if the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 are operated in any order, the “combination of symbols related to the red seven BB” can be displayed on the active line. If the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 are operated at the right timing, “a combination of symbols related to the red seven BB” is displayed on the active line. However, if the operation of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 is not detected at a timing at which “the combination of symbols related to the red seven BB” can be displayed on the active line, the “red seven BB” The “combination of symbols related to BB” cannot be displayed on the active line.

  In addition, when the “weak watermelon” with the winning number “18” is determined as the winning combination by the internal lottery process described later, the condition device that is activated is “NML01”. In this case, if the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 are operated at a timing at which “a combination of symbols related to watermelon” can be displayed on the effective line, “a combination of symbols related to watermelon” "Can be displayed on the active line.

  In addition, when the “strong watermelon” with the winning number “19” is determined as the winning combination by the internal lottery process described later, the condition devices that are activated are “NML01” and “NML08”. In this case, if the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 are operated at a timing at which “a combination of symbols related to watermelon” can be displayed on the effective line, “a combination of symbols related to watermelon” "Can be displayed on the active line. Here, in the case where the “weak watermelon” with the winning number “18” is determined and the “strong watermelon” with the winning number “19” is determined by the internal lottery process described later, The effective line for displaying “combinations” is different. For example, when “weak watermelon” with a winning number “18” is determined as a winning combination by an internal lottery process to be described later, if the symbol position of the left reel 18 is “11”, the left reel 18 It stops at “08”, and “the combination of symbols related to watermelon” stops at the upper line or the right-down line. On the other hand, in the case where “strong watermelon” with the winning number “19” is determined as the winning combination by the internal lottery process described later, when the symbol position of the left reel 18 is “11”, the left reel 18 It stops at the position “07” and “the combination of symbols related to watermelon” stops at the middle line. Thus, the “weak watermelon” with the winning number “18” and the “strong watermelon” with the winning number “19” have different effective lines on which “the combination of symbols related to watermelon” is displayed.

  In addition, the condition device that is activated when “weak cherry” with the winning number “20” is determined as the winning combination by the internal lottery process described later is “NML06”. In this case, if the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 are operated at a timing at which “the combination of symbols related to the first cherry” can be displayed on the effective line, Such a symbol combination "can be displayed on the active line.

  In addition, when the “strong cherry” of the winning number “21” is determined as the winning combination by the internal lottery process described later, the condition device that is activated is “NML07”. In this case, if the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 are operated at a timing at which “the combination of symbols related to the second cherry” can be displayed on the effective line, Such a symbol combination "can be displayed on the active line.

  In addition, when the “special combination” of the winning number “22” is determined as the winning combination by the internal lottery process described later, the condition device that is activated is “NML08”. In this case, if the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 are operated at a timing at which “a combination of symbols related to chance” can be displayed on the effective line, “a symbol related to chance” is displayed. Can be displayed on the active line.

  On the other hand, a winning combination is provided in which the combination of symbols arranged on the active line does not differ regardless of the order of operation of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13. For example, when the “common bell” with the winning number “17” is determined as the winning combination by the internal lottery process described later, the condition device that is activated is “NML05”. In this case, regardless of the order in which the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 are operated, “the combination of symbols relating to the fourth bell” is displayed on the active line. The Rukoto. If the “common bell” with the winning number “17” is determined as a winning combination by the internal lottery process described later, the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 are stopped at any symbol position. Even if the operation is detected, “the combination of symbols related to the fourth bell” is displayed on the active line.

(First RT gaming state winning combination determination table)
Next, the winning combination determination table for the first RT gaming state will be described based on FIG.

  The first RT gaming state winning combination determination table is stored in the main ROM 302 and is used when determining a winning combination by an internal lottery process described later in the “first RT gaming state” described later. In the first RT gaming state winning combination determination table, a winning number, a winning combination, and a lottery value for each set value are defined. Here, in the present embodiment, the first RT gaming state winning combination determination table illustrates the lottery value when the setting value is “1” and the lottery value when the setting value is “6”. A drawing of a lottery value when the value is “2”, a lottery value when the setting value is “3”, a lottery value when the setting value is “4”, and a lottery value when the setting value is “5” Omitted.

  The first RT gaming state winning combination determination table includes “normal replay” with a winning number “01”, “replay A during RT1” with a winning number “02”, and “replay B during RT1” with a winning number “03”. ”,“ Replay C during RT1 ”with a winning number“ 04 ”,“ Replay D during RT1 ”with a winning number“ 05 ”,“ Push order bell A ”with a winning number“ 12 ”, and a winning number“ 13 ”. “Push order bell B”, win number “14” “push order bell C”, win number “15” “push order bell D”, win number “16” “push order bell E” Winning number “17” “common bell”, winning number “18” “weak watermelon”, winning number “19” “strong watermelon”, winning number “20” “weak cherry” The number “21” “strong cherry”, the winning number “22” “special role”, and the winning number “ “Red BB” of “3”, “Black BB” of winning number “24”, “Red RB” of winning number “25”, “Black RB” of winning number “26”, and winning number “27” “Weak watermelon + red BB”, winning number “28” “weak watermelon + black BB”, winning number “29” “weak watermelon + red RB”, and winning number “30” “weak watermelon + "Black RB", "Strong watermelon + red BB" with winning number "31", "Strong watermelon + black BB" with winning number "32", "Strong watermelon + red RB" with winning number "33", Winning number “34” “strong watermelon + black RB”, winning number “35” “weak cherry + red BB”, winning number “36” “weak cherry + black BB”, and winning number “37” "Weak cherry + red RB", winning number "38" "weak cherry + black RB" and winning number "39" "strong cherry + red B" ”,“ Strong cherry + black BB ”with winning number“ 40 ”,“ strong cherry + red RB ”with winning number“ 41 ”,“ strong cherry + black RB ”with winning number“ 42 ”, and winning number “Special role + red BB” of “43”, “Special role + black BB” of winning number “44”, “Special role + red RB” of winning number “45”, “ A lottery value is defined for “special combination + black RB”.

  In other words, the lottery value other than these is “0”, and when the lottery is performed using the winning combination determination table for the first RT gaming state, “Replay A during RT2” with the winning number “06” and the winning number “ "Replay B during RT2" with "07", "Replay C during RT2" with winning number "08", "Replay A during RT3" with winning number "09", and "Replay B during RT3" with winning number "10" ”And“ Replay C during RT3 ”with the winning number“ 11 ”will not be determined as the winning combination.

(2nd RT gaming state winning combination determination table)
Next, the winning combination determination table for the second RT gaming state will be described based on FIG.

  The second RT gaming state winning combination determination table is stored in the main ROM 302, and is used when determining a winning combination by an internal lottery process described later in the “second RT gaming state” described later. In the second RT gaming state winning combination determination table, a winning number, a winning combination, and a lottery value for each set value are defined. Here, in the present embodiment, the second RT gaming state winning combination determination table exemplifies the lottery value when the setting value is “1” and the lottery value when the setting value is “6”. A drawing of a lottery value when the value is “2”, a lottery value when the setting value is “3”, a lottery value when the setting value is “4”, and a lottery value when the setting value is “5” Omitted.

  In addition, the winning combination determination table for the second RT gaming state includes “normal replay” of the winning number “01”, “replaying during RT2” of the winning number “06”, and “replaying during RT2” of the winning number “07”. ”,“ Replay C in RT2 ”with winning number“ 08 ”,“ Push order bell A ”with winning number“ 12 ”,“ Push order bell B ”with winning number“ 13 ”, and winning number“ 14 ” “Push Order Bell C”, “Push Order Bell D” of Winning Number “15”, “Push Order Bell E” of Winning Number “16”, “Common Bell” of Winning Number “17”, Winning The “weak watermelon” with the number “18”, the “strong watermelon” with the winning number “19”, the “weak cherry” with the winning number “20”, the “strong cherry” with the winning number “21”, and the winning number “ “Special” ”of 22”, “Red BB” of winning number “23”, “Black” of winning number “24” “B”, “Red RB” of winning number “25”, “Black RB” of winning number “26”, “Weak watermelon + red BB” of winning number “27”, “ "Weak watermelon + black BB", winning number "29" "weak watermelon + red RB", winning number "30" "weak watermelon + black RB", winning number "31" "strong watermelon + red BB" ”,“ Strong watermelon + black BB ”with winning number“ 32 ”,“ strong watermelon + red RB ”with winning number“ 33 ”,“ strong watermelon + black RB ”with winning number“ 34 ”, and winning number “35” “weak cherry + red BB”, winning number “36” “weak cherry + black BB”, winning number “37” “weak cherry + red RB”, and winning number “38” “ Weak cherry + black RB ", winning number" 39 "" strong cherry + red BB "and winning number" 40 "" strong cherry + black B " ”,“ Strong cherry + red RB ”with winning number“ 41 ”,“ strong cherry + black RB ”with winning number“ 42 ”,“ special role + red BB ”with winning number“ 43 ”, and winning number Lottery values are defined for “special combination + black BB” of “44”, “special combination + red RB” of winning number “45”, and “special combination + black RB” of winning number “46”.

  In other words, the lottery value other than these is “0”, and when the lottery is performed using the winning combination determination table for the second RT gaming state, “Replay A during RT1” with the winning number “02” and the winning number “ 03 “Replay during RT1”, “04 Replay during RT1” with winning number “04”, “Replay during RT1” with winning number “05”, “Replay during RT3” with winning number “09” ”,“ Replay B during RT3 ”with the winning number“ 10 ”, and“ Replay C during RT3 ”with the winning number“ 11 ”are not determined as the winning combination.

(3rd RT gaming state winning combination determination table)
Next, the winning combination determination table for the third RT gaming state will be described based on FIG.

  The third RT gaming state winning combination determination table is stored in the main ROM 302 and is used when determining a winning combination by an internal lottery process described later in the “third RT gaming state” described later. In the third RT gaming state winning combination determination table, a winning number, a winning combination, and a lottery value for each set value are defined. Here, in the present embodiment, the third RT gaming state winning combination determination table illustrates the lottery value when the setting value is “1” and the lottery value when the setting value is “6”. A drawing of a lottery value when the value is “2”, a lottery value when the setting value is “3”, a lottery value when the setting value is “4”, and a lottery value when the setting value is “5” Omitted.

  Further, the winning combination determination table for the third RT gaming state includes “normal replay” of the winning number “01”, “replay A during RT3” of the winning number “09”, and “replay B during RT3” of the winning number “10”. ”,“ Replay C in RT3 ”with a winning number“ 11 ”,“ Push order bell A ”with a winning number“ 12 ”,“ Push order bell B ”with a winning number“ 13 ”, and a winning number“ 14 ”. “Push Order Bell C”, “Push Order Bell D” of Winning Number “15”, “Push Order Bell E” of Winning Number “16”, “Common Bell” of Winning Number “17”, Winning The “weak watermelon” with the number “18”, the “strong watermelon” with the winning number “19”, the “weak cherry” with the winning number “20”, the “strong cherry” with the winning number “21”, and the winning number “ “Special” ”of 22”, “Red BB” of winning number “23”, “Black” of winning number “24” “B”, “Red RB” of winning number “25”, “Black RB” of winning number “26”, “Weak watermelon + red BB” of winning number “27”, “ "Weak watermelon + black BB", winning number "29" "weak watermelon + red RB", winning number "30" "weak watermelon + black RB", winning number "31" "strong watermelon + red BB" ”,“ Strong watermelon + black BB ”with winning number“ 32 ”,“ strong watermelon + red RB ”with winning number“ 33 ”,“ strong watermelon + black RB ”with winning number“ 34 ”, and winning number “35” “weak cherry + red BB”, winning number “36” “weak cherry + black BB”, winning number “37” “weak cherry + red RB”, and winning number “38” “ Weak cherry + black RB ", winning number" 39 "" strong cherry + red BB "and winning number" 40 "" strong cherry + black B " ”,“ Strong cherry + red RB ”with winning number“ 41 ”,“ strong cherry + black RB ”with winning number“ 42 ”,“ special role + red BB ”with winning number“ 43 ”, and winning number Lottery values are defined for “special combination + black BB” of “44”, “special combination + red RB” of winning number “45”, and “special combination + black RB” of winning number “46”.

  In other words, the lottery value other than these is “0”, and when the lottery is performed using the third RT gaming state winning combination determination table, “RT1 replay A” with the winning number “02” and the winning number “ “Replay B during RT1” of “03”, “Replay C during RT1” of winning number “04”, “Replay during RT1” of winning number “05”, and “Replay A during RT2” of winning number “06” ”,“ Replay B during RT2 ”with the winning number“ 07 ”, and“ Replay C during RT2 ”with the winning number“ 08 ”are not determined as the winning combination.

(Winning role determination table for 4th RT gaming state)
Next, the winning combination determination table for the fourth RT gaming state will be described based on FIG.

  The fourth RT gaming state winning combination determination table is stored in the main ROM 302 and is used when determining a winning combination by an internal lottery process described later in the “4RT gaming state” described later. In the fourth RT gaming state winning combination determination table, a winning number, a winning combination, and a lottery value for each set value are defined. Here, in the present embodiment, the 4RT gaming state winning combination determination table illustrates the lottery value when the setting value is “1” and the lottery value when the setting value is “6”. A drawing of a lottery value when the value is “2”, a lottery value when the setting value is “3”, a lottery value when the setting value is “4”, and a lottery value when the setting value is “5” Omitted.

  The winning combination determination table for the fourth RT gaming state includes “normal replay” of the winning number “01”, “push order bell A” of the winning number “12”, and “push order bell B of the winning number“ 13 ”. ”,“ Push Order Bell C ”of the winning number“ 14 ”,“ Push Order Bell D ”of the winning number“ 15 ”,“ Push Order Bell E ”of the winning number“ 16 ”, and“ 17 ” “Common bell”, “weak watermelon” with winning number “18”, “strong watermelon” with winning number “19”, “weak cherry” with winning number “20”, and “weak cherry” with winning number “21” Lottery values are defined for “strong cherry” and “special role” of the winning number “22”.

  In other words, the lottery value other than these is “0”, and in the case of performing the lottery using the fourth RT gaming state winning combination determination table, the winning number “02” “Replay A during RT1” and the winning number “ “Replay B during RT1” of “03”, “Replay C during RT1” of winning number “04”, “Replay during RT1” of winning number “05”, and “Replay A during RT2” of winning number “06” ”,“ Replay B during RT2 ”with a winning number“ 07 ”,“ Replay C during RT2 ”with a winning number“ 08 ”,“ Replay A during RT3 ”with a winning number“ 09 ”, and a winning number“ 10 ”. “RT3 replay B”, winning number “11” “RT3 replay C”, winning number “23” “red BB”, winning number “24” “black BB” and winning number “ "Red RB" of 25 "and" 26 "of winning number" 26 " “RB”, “weak watermelon + red BB” with winning number “27”, “weak watermelon + black BB” with winning number “28”, “weak watermelon + red RB” with winning number “29”, winning Number “30” “weak watermelon + black RB”, winning number “31” “strong watermelon + red BB”, winning number “32” “strong watermelon + black BB”, and winning number “33” "Strong watermelon + red RB", "strong watermelon + black RB" with winning number "34", "weak cherry + red BB" with winning number "35", and "weak cherry + black" with winning number "36" "BB", winning number "37" "weak cherry + red RB", winning number "38" "weak cherry + black RB", winning number "39" "strong cherry + red BB", winning The number “40” “strong cherry + black BB”, the winning number “41” “strong cherry + red RB”, and the winning number “ 2 “strong cherry + black RB”, winning number “43” “special role + red BB”, winning number “44” “special role + black BB” and winning number “45” “special” “Role + Red RB” and “Special Role + Black RB” of the winning number “46” are not determined as the winning combination.

(RB game status winning combination determination table)
Next, the winning combination determination table for RB gaming state will be described based on FIG.

  The RB gaming state winning combination determination table is stored in the main ROM 302 and is used when determining the winning combination by an internal lottery process described later in the “RB gaming state” described later. The RB gaming state winning combination determination table defines a winning number, a winning combination, and a lottery value for each set value. Here, in this embodiment, the winning combination determination table for the RB gaming state illustrates the lottery value when the setting value is “1” and the lottery value when the setting value is “6”. The drawing of the lottery value when the setting value is “3”, the lottery value when the setting value is “4”, and the lottery value when the setting value is “5” is omitted. doing.

  In addition, the winning combination determination table for the RB gaming state includes the “push order bell A” with the winning number “12”, the “push order bell B” with the winning number “13”, and the “push order bell” with the winning number “14”. “C”, “Push Order Bell D” of the winning number “15”, “Push Order Bell E” of the winning number “16”, “Common Bell” of the winning number “17”, and “18” “Weak watermelon”, “strong watermelon” with winning number “19”, “weak cherry” with winning number “20”, “strong cherry” with winning number “21”, “special” with winning number “22” A lottery value is defined for “combination”.

  That is, the lottery value other than these is “0”, and when performing the lottery using the RB gaming state winning combination determination table, the “normal replay” of the winning number “01” and the winning number “02” “Replay during RT1”, “Replay during RT1” with winning number “03”, “Replay during RT1” with winning number “04”, “Replay during RT1” with winning number “05”, Winning number “06” “RT2 replay A”, winning number “07” “RT2 replay B”, winning number “08” “RT2 replay C”, and winning number “09” “RT3” “Replay A during RT3”, “Replay B during RT3” with winning number “10”, “Replay C during RT3” with winning number “11”, “Red BB” with winning number “23”, and winning number “24” "Black BB" and winning number "25" “Red RB”, winning number “26” “black RB”, winning number “27” “weak watermelon + red BB”, winning number “28” “weak watermelon + black BB”, and winning number “ 29 “weak watermelon + red RB”, winning number “30” “weak watermelon + black RB”, winning number “31” “strong watermelon + red BB”, and winning number “32” “strong” "Watermelon + black BB", "strong watermelon + red RB" with winning number "33", "strong watermelon + black RB" with winning number "34", and "weak cherry + red BB" with winning number "35" The winning number “36” “weak cherry + black BB”, the winning number “37” “weak cherry + red RB”, the winning number “38” “weak cherry + black RB”, and the winning number “ 39 ”“ strong cherry + red BB ”, winning number“ 40 ”“ strong cherry + black BB ”, and winning number“ 41 ”“ "Cherry + Red RB", Winning Number "42" "Strong Cherry + Black RB", Winning Number "43" "Special Role + Red BB", Winning Number "44" "Special Role + Black BB" Then, “special combination + red RB” of the winning number “45” and “special combination + black RB” of the winning number “46” are not determined as the winning combination.

  In this embodiment, “normal replay”, “RT1 replay A”, “RT1 replay B”, “RT1 replay C”, “RT1 replay D”, and “RT2 replay A”. “RT2 replay B”, “RT2 replay C”, “RT3 replay A”, “RT3 replay B”, and “RT3 replay C” are collectively referred to as “replay”.

  Further, “RT1 replay A”, “RT1 replay B”, “RT1 replay C”, and “RT1 replay D” are collectively referred to as “RT1 replay”, and “RT2 replay A”. “RT2 replay B” and “RT2 replay C” are collectively referred to as “RT2 replay C”, and “RT3 replay A”, “RT3 replay B”, and “RT3 replay C” are collectively referred to as “RT2 replay C”. This is called “RT3 replay”.

  Also, “RT1 replay A”, “RT1 replay B”, “RT1 replay C”, “RT1 replay D”, “RT2 replay A”, and “RT2 replay B”, “Replay C during RT2”, “Replay A during RT3”, “Replay B during RT3”, and “Replay C during RT3” are collectively referred to as “push order replay”.

  Further, “push order bell A”, “push order bell B”, “push order bell C”, “push order bell D”, and “push order bell E” are collectively referred to as “push order bell”. "Push order bell A", "push order bell B", "push order bell C", "push order bell D", "push order bell E", and "common bell" "Bell", "weak watermelon" and "strong watermelon" are collectively called "watermelon", "weak cherry" and "strong cherry" are collectively called "cherry", and "red BB" “Black BB” is collectively referred to as “BB”, “Red RB” and “Black RB” are collectively referred to as “RB”, and “BB” and “RB” are collectively referred to as “Bonus”. That's it.

  The first RT gaming state winning combination determination table, the second RT gaming state winning combination determination table, the third RT gaming state winning combination determination table, the fourth RT gaming state winning combination determination table, and the RB gaming state use The winning combination determination table is generically called “winning combination determination table”.

(Game state transition diagram)
Next, the game state transition diagram will be described with reference to FIG.

  The game state transition diagram defines a current game state, a transition condition that is a condition for transitioning the game state, and a game state of a transition destination.

  Here, when the current gaming state is the “first RT gaming state” and the “combination of symbols relating to the second RT gaming state transition replay” is displayed on the active line, the “first RT gaming state” When the state is shifted to the “second RT gaming state” and “bonus” is won by an internal lottery process described later, the state shifts from the “first RT gaming state” to the “fourth RT gaming state”.

  On the other hand, when the current gaming state is the “second RT gaming state”, when the “combination of symbols relating to the first RT gaming state transition replay” is displayed on the active line, the “second RT gaming state” is changed to “ When the transition is made to the “first RT gaming state” and “the combination of symbols relating to the third RT gaming state transition replay” is displayed on the active line, the transition is made from the “second RT gaming state” to the “third RT gaming state” When the “bonus” is won by the internal lottery process described later, the “second RT gaming state” is shifted to the “fourth RT gaming state”.

  On the other hand, when the current gaming state is the “third RT gaming state” and the “combination of symbols relating to the first RT gaming state transition replay” is displayed on the active line, the “third RT gaming state” is changed to “ When the state is shifted to the “first RT gaming state” and “bonus” is won by an internal lottery process described later, the state shifts from the “third RT gaming state” to the “fourth RT gaming state”.

  On the other hand, when the current gaming state is the “fourth RT gaming state” and the “combination of symbols related to bonus” is displayed on the active line, the “fourth RT gaming state” is changed to the “RB gaming state”. To be migrated.

  On the other hand, when the current gaming state is the “RB gaming state” and the bonus is ended, the “RB gaming state” is changed to the “first RT gaming state”.

(State transition diagram managed by the main control board)
Next, a state transition diagram managed by the main control board will be described with reference to FIG.

(Normal state)
The “normal state” is a disadvantageous state for the player. Here, in the present embodiment, the “normal state” shifts to the “ART ready state” when “watermelon”, “cherry”, and “special role” are determined as a winning combination by an internal lottery process described later. When the lottery for determining whether or not to shift to the “ART ready state” is determined by the lottery, control for shifting from the “normal state” to the “ART ready state” is performed. Further, in the “normal state”, when “bonus” is determined as the winning combination by an internal lottery process described later, a control to shift from the “normal state” to the “bonus preparation state” is performed. By these, the interest in the game in the “normal state” is improved.

(Bonus ready state)
The “bonus preparation state” is a state that is shifted to when a “bonus” is determined as a winning combination by an internal lottery process described later. Specifically, in the “bonus preparation state”, the left stop button at a timing at which “a combination of symbols related to the bonus” corresponding to the bonus determined by the internal lottery process described later can be displayed on the active line. 11. By operating the middle stop button 12 and the right stop button 13, the “combination of symbols related to the bonus” can be displayed on the active line. Further, in the “bonus preparation state”, when “the combination of symbols related to BB” is displayed on the active line, the control to shift from the “bonus preparation state” to the “BB state” is performed. When the “combination of symbols” is displayed on the active line, control for shifting from the “bonus preparation state” to the “RB state” is performed. Further, in the “bonus preparation state”, as in the “normal state”, when “watermelon”, “cherry”, and “special part” are determined as the winning combination by the internal lottery process described later, A lottery is performed as to whether or not to shift to the “state”. Then, when it is determined that the transition to the “ART ready state” is made by the lottery, the control to shift to the “ART ready state” is performed after the “BB state” or the “RB state” ends.

(BB state)
The “BB state” is a state in which, in the “bonus preparation state”, the transition is made based on the “combination of symbols related to BB” being displayed on the active line. Here, in the present embodiment, the “BB state” is changed to “ART ready state” when “watermelon”, “cherry”, or “special part” is determined as a winning combination by an internal lottery process described later. A lottery of whether or not to move is performed. Thereby, the interest with respect to the game in "BB state" is improved. In addition, if it is not determined in the “BB state” to shift to the “ART ready state”, control to shift to the “normal state” is performed after the “BB state” ends, and the “ART ready state” When it is determined to shift to “”, control to shift to “ART ready state” is performed after completion of “BB state”.

  In the “BB state”, when “push order bell” is determined as a winning combination by an internal lottery process to be described later, the “combination of symbols related to the bell” is displayed on the active line in an advantageous manner for the player. The display order of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 is notified by the liquid crystal display device 31 and the speaker 33.

(RB state)
The “RB state” is a state that is shifted when “combination of symbols related to RB” is displayed on the active line in the “bonus preparation state”. Here, in the present embodiment, the “RB state” is changed to “ART ready state” when “watermelon”, “cherry”, or “special part” is determined as a winning combination by an internal lottery process described later. A lottery of whether or not to move is performed. Thereby, the interest with respect to the game in "RB state" is improved. In addition, when it is not determined in the “RB state” to shift to the “ART ready state”, the control to shift to the “normal state” is performed after the “RB state” ends, and the “ART ready state” When it is determined to shift to “”, control to shift to “ART ready state” is performed after the completion of “RB state”.

  In the “RB state”, when “push order bell” is determined as the winning combination by the internal lottery process described later, “the combination of symbols related to the bell” is displayed on the active line in an advantageous manner for the player. The display order of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 is notified by the liquid crystal display device 31 and the speaker 33.

(ART ready state)
When the “ART ready state” is determined to shift to the “ART ready state” in the “normal state”, it is determined to shift to the “ART ready state” in the “bonus ready state” or the “BB state”. When the “BB state” ends, or when the “bonus ready state” or “RB state” is determined to shift to the “ART ready state”, the state shifts to when the “RB state” ends. It is. In addition, in the “ART ready state”, when “the combination of symbols relating to the 3rd RT game state transition replay” is displayed on the active line, the control to shift from the “ART ready state” to the “ART state” is performed. In the “ART ready state”, when “bonus” is determined as a winning combination by an internal lottery process to be described later, a control for shifting from the “ART ready state” to the “ART bonus ready state” is performed. In the “ART ready state”, the number of games that can be played in the “ART state” when the “watermelon”, “cherry”, and “special part” are determined as the winning combination by the internal lottery process described later. A lottery for whether or not to add is performed.

  In the “ART ready state”, when “push order bell” is determined as a winning combination by an internal lottery process described later, “the combination of symbols related to the bell” is activated in an advantageous manner for the player. In order to display above, the operation order of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 is notified by the liquid crystal display device 31 and the speaker 33. Further, in the “ART ready state”, when “replay during RT1” is determined as a winning combination by an internal lottery process described later, the “combination of symbols relating to the second RT gaming state transition replay” is on the active line. As shown, when the operation order of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 is notified by the liquid crystal display device 31 or the speaker 33, and “RT2 replay” is determined as a winning combination, The operation sequence of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 is controlled by the liquid crystal display device 31 and the speaker 33 so that “the combination of symbols relating to the third RT gaming state transition replay” is displayed on the active line. Informed.

(ART state)
The “ART state” is displayed in order to display “a combination of symbols related to the bell” on the active line in an advantageous manner for the player when “push order bell” is won by an internal lottery process described later. This is a state in which the operation order of the stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 is notified. Thereby, the player operates the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 in accordance with the notified operation order of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13, thereby The “combination of symbols related to the bell” can be displayed on the active line in an advantageous manner for the player. Further, in the “ART state”, when “bonus” is determined as the winning combination by an internal lottery process described later, control is performed to shift from the “ART state” to the “BONUS ARTICLE PREPARATION state”. Further, in the “ART state”, when the value of an ART state game number counter, which will be described later, becomes “0”, a control to shift from the “ART state” to the “normal state” is performed. In the “ART state”, when “Watermelon”, “Cherry”, and “Special role” are determined as the winning combination by the internal lottery process described later, the number of games that can be played in the “ART state” is added. A lottery of whether or not to do is performed.

  In the “ART state”, when “push order bell” is determined as the winning combination by the internal lottery process described later, “the combination of symbols related to the bell” is displayed on the active line in an advantageous manner for the player. In order to display the information, the operation order of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 is notified by the liquid crystal display device 31 and the speaker 33, and “replay during RT3” is performed as a winning combination by an internal lottery process described later. Is determined, the operation order of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 is set to the liquid crystal display device 31 or the like so that the “combination of symbols related to general replay” is displayed on the active line. Notification is given by the speaker 33.

(Bonus ready state during ART)
“Bonus preparation state during ART” is a state in which “bonus” is won in “ART preparation state” or “ART state”. Specifically, in the “artial bonus preparation state”, in the same way as the “bonus preparation state”, the “combination of bonus-related symbols” corresponding to the bonus determined by the internal lottery process described later is placed on the active line. By operating the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 at a timing at which they can be displayed, the “combination of symbols related to the bonus” can be displayed on the active line. In addition, in the “art bonus preparation state”, when “a combination of symbols related to BB” is displayed on the active line, control is performed to shift from the “art bonus preparation state” to the “art BB state”. In other words, when “a combination of symbols related to RB” is displayed on the active line, a control is performed to shift from the “ART bonus preparation state” to the “ART RB state”. In the “art bonus preparation state”, a game that can be played in the “ART state” when “watermelon”, “cherry”, and “special role” are determined as the winning combination by an internal lottery process described later. A lottery is performed as to whether or not to add a number.

(BB state during ART)
The “BB state during ART” is a state in which “the combination of symbols related to BB” is displayed on the active line in the “BONUS PREPARATION state during ART”. Here, in the present embodiment, the “ART state BB state” is the “ART state” when “watermelon”, “cherry”, and “special part” are determined as the winning combination by the internal lottery process described later. A lottery is performed as to whether to add the number of games that can be played. Thereby, the interest in the game in the “BB state during ART” is improved. In addition, when the BB is completed in the “ART BB state”, control is performed to shift from the “ART BB state” to the “ART preparation state”.

  In “ART during BB state”, when “push order bell” is determined as the winning combination by the internal lottery process described later, “the combination of symbols related to the bell” is effective in an advantageous manner for the player. In order to display on the line, the operation order of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 is notified by the liquid crystal display device 31 and the speaker 33.

(RB state during ART)
The “RB state during ART” is a state in which “the combination of symbols related to RB” is displayed on the active line in the “BONUS PREPARATION state during ART”. Here, in this embodiment, “RB state during ART” is “ART state” when “Watermelon”, “Cherry”, and “Special role” are determined as the winning combination by the internal lottery process described later. A lottery is performed as to whether to add the number of games that can be played. Thereby, the interest in the game in the “RB state during ART” is improved. Further, when the RB ends in the “RB state during ART”, control is performed to shift from the “RB state during ART” to the “ART preparation state”.

  In the “RB state during ART”, when “push order bell” is determined as the winning combination by the internal lottery process described later, “the combination of symbols related to the bell” is effective in an advantageous manner for the player. In order to display on the line, the operation order of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 is notified by the liquid crystal display device 31 and the speaker 33.

(ART preparation state transfer lottery table)
Next, the ART preparation state transition lottery table will be described with reference to FIG.

  The ART preparation state transition lottery table is provided in the main ROM 302 and is provided for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to shift to the “ART preparation state”. Here, in the present embodiment, the ART ready state transition lottery table is a normal state used when performing a lottery to determine whether or not to shift to the “ART ready state” in the “normal state” or “bonus ready state”. ART ready state transition lottery table (see FIG. 15 (A)) and “BB state”, the BB state ART ready state transition lottery used when performing a lottery to determine whether or not to shift to the “ART ready state” A table (see FIG. 15B) and an RB state ART ready state transition lottery table (FIG. 15C) used when performing a lottery to determine whether or not to shift to the “ART ready state” in the “RB state”. ))). In the ART preparation state transition lottery table, a lottery value to be shifted to the “ART preparation state” is defined for each winning combination. For example, in the “normal state”, when “weak watermelon” with the winning number “18” is determined as the winning combination, it is determined to shift to the “ART ready state” with a probability of “2468/65536”. .

(Additional lottery table)
Next, the extra lottery table will be described with reference to FIG.

  The extra lottery table is provided in the main ROM 302 and is provided for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to add the number of games that can be played in the “ART state”. Here, in the present embodiment, the extra lottery table is used to determine whether or not to add the number of games that can be played in the “ART state” in the “ART state” or the “ART bonus preparation state”. Whether or not to add the number of games that can be played in the “ART state” in the ART state extra lottery table (see FIG. 16A) and “ART BB state” or “ART RB state” to be used It is configured by an extra lottery table for bonus state during ART used when performing the lottery (see FIG. 16B). Further, in the extra lottery table, a lottery value for the number of extra games is defined for each winning combination. For example, in the “ART state”, when “weak watermelon” with the winning number “18” is determined as the winning combination by the internal lottery process described later, the number of additional games is “30” with a probability of “3899/65536”. Game is determined, “50” game is determined as an additional game number with a probability of “2288/65536”, “100” game is determined as an additional game number with a probability of “268/65536”, and “79/65536” The “200” game is determined as the additional game number with the probability of “300”, and the “300” game is determined as the additional game number with the probability of “20/65536”.

(Relationship between conditional device command and instruction information)
Next, the relationship between the conditional device command and the instruction information will be described based on FIG.

  First, the “condition device command” in FIG. 17 is a command including information related to the winning combination, and is transmitted from the main control board 300 to the sub-control board 400. In the “conditional device command”, the contents indicated by the conditional device command shown in FIG. 17 are defined. The “instruction information” is information related to an operation order for displaying a combination of symbols related to the winning combination in a display mode advantageous to the player. The “instruction information command” is a command indicating information related to an operation order for displaying a combination of symbols related to the winning combination in a display mode advantageous to the player. 400 is transmitted. In the “instruction information command”, the contents indicated by the instruction information command shown in FIG. 17 are defined. For example, the sub-control board 400 refers to the content indicated by the received “instruction information command”, and determines the operation sequence of the stop button via the effect control board 500 through the liquid crystal display device 31, the LED 32, the speaker 33, and the like. Use to inform. In a game in which an “instruction information command” other than “no instruction” described later is transmitted from the main control board 300 to the sub control board 400, the payout number display 16 managed by the main control board 300 The instruction information is displayed, and the sub-control board 400 displays the instruction information using the liquid crystal display device 31 and the like via the effect control board 500.

  In the contents indicated by the “instruction information command” in FIG. 17, “1” corresponds to the left stop button 11, “2” corresponds to the middle stop button 12, and “3” Corresponds to the right stop button 13. For example, in the content indicated by the “instruction information command”, when the information related to the operation order is defined as “123”, the left stop button 11 is operated first, the middle stop button 12 is operated next, and the right It shows that the stop button 13 is operated last.

  In the content indicated by the “instruction information command” in FIG. 17, “no instruction” indicates that the operation order is not defined. For example, the sub control board 400 receives the “instruction information command”. When the content indicated by “No indication” indicates that the operation order using the liquid crystal display device 31, the LED 32, the speaker 33, and the like is not notified via the effect control board 500.

  In FIG. 17, the states managed by the main control board 300 are divided into “normal state”, “bonus preparation state”, “ART bonus preparation state”, and “others”. Note that “other” indicates a state managed by the main control board 300 other than “normal state”, “bonus preparation state”, and “ART bonus preparation state”. “RB state”, “ART state”, “ART ready state”, “BB state during ART”, and “RB state during ART” correspond to “Other”. In the following explanation, the items of “bonus preparation state” and “bonus preparation state during ART” will be applied to the case of “bonus preparation state during ART”, and the description of “others” will be “ The description is applied to the case of “ART state”, but the items of “bonus preparation state” and “bonus preparation state during ART” may be applied to the case of “bonus preparation state”. The item “” may be applied when the state is other than the “ART state”. It should be noted that the portions indicated by “−” in the “bonus preparation state” and the “ART bonus preparation state” indicate that the winning combination is not determined.

(About sending conditional device commands)
The condition device command is divided into one that is transmitted with one winning combination for one winning number and one that is transmitted with one winning combination for a plurality of winning numbers. For example, in FIG. 17, “normal replay” with a winning number “01”, “common bell” with a winning number “17”, “weak watermelon” with a winning number “18”, and “strong” with a winning number “19”. “Watermelon”, “weak cherry” with winning number “20”, “strong cherry” with winning number “21”, “special role” with winning number “22”, and “red BB” with winning number “23” The winning number “24” “Black BB”, the winning number “25” “Red RB”, the winning number “26” “Black RB”, and the winning number “27” “Weak watermelon + red BB” ”,“ Weak watermelon + black BB ”with winning number“ 28 ”,“ weak watermelon + red RB ”with winning number“ 29 ”,“ weak watermelon + black RB ”with winning number“ 30 ”, and winning number “31” “strong watermelon + red BB”, winning number “32” “strong watermelon + black BB” and winning number “33” "Strong watermelon + red RB", "strong watermelon + black RB" with winning number "34", "weak cherry + red BB" with winning number "35", and "weak cherry + black BB" with winning number "36" ”,“ Weak cherry + red RB ”with winning number“ 37 ”,“ weak cherry + black RB ”with winning number“ 38 ”,“ strong cherry + red BB ”with winning number“ 39 ”, and winning number “40” “strong cherry + black BB”, winning number “41” “strong cherry + red RB”, winning number “42” “strong cherry + black RB”, and winning number “43” “ “Special role + red BB”, “Special role + black BB” with winning number “44”, “Special role + red RB” with winning number “45”, and “Special role + black RB” with winning number “46” "" Normal status "," BONTS ready status during ART (excluding "Push order replay" and "Bonus") ""ARTstate" together, are transmitted in one of the winning combination for one of the winning numbers. For example, in the case of “normal replay” of the winning number “01”, a conditional device command indicating “normal replay” is transmitted for both “normal state”, “ART bonus preparation state”, and “ART state”.

  On the other hand, “push order replay” and “push order bell” are used for a plurality of winning numbers in both of “normal state”, “ART bonus preparation state (excluding“ push order replay ”)”, and “ART state”. Sent in the winning combination. For example, “Replay A during RT1” with a winning number “02”, “Replay B during RT1” with a winning number “03”, “Replay C during RT1” with a winning number “04”, “In RT1” with a winning number “05”. “Replay D” includes “normal state” and “ART state”, “replay A during RT1,” “replay B during RT1,” “replay C during RT1,” and “replay D during RT1.” “Replay” is transmitted as a conditional device command indicating “replay”, “replay during RT2” with winning number “06”, “replay during RT2” with winning number “07”, and “replay during RT2” with winning number “08”. , Both “normal state” and “ART state”, a condition device frame indicating “replay during RT2”, which is a set of “replay during RT2”, “replay during RT2”, and “replay during RT2”. “Replay A during RT3” with a winning number “09”, “Replay B during RT3” with a winning number “10”, and “Replay C during RT3” with a winning number “11” are “normal state”, Both the “ART state” are transmitted as a conditional device command indicating “Replay during RT3”, which is a collection of “Replay during RT3”, “Replay during RT3 B”, and “Replay during RT3”.

  In addition, “push order bell A” of winning number “12”, “push order bell B” of winning number “13”, “push order bell C” of winning number “14”, “push order of winning number“ 15 ”. The “push order bell E” of the “bell D” and the winning number “16” is transmitted as a condition device command indicating “push order bell” for both the “normal state”, the “BONUS PREPARATION state during ART”, and the “ART state”. The For example, if “one winning combination” is “normal replay” with a winning number “01”, “normal replay” corresponds to one winning combination and, for example, “ If “weak watermelon + red BB”, “weak watermelon + red BB” corresponds to one winning combination.

(About sending instruction information commands)
In the instruction information command, the contents to be transmitted are defined in each of “normal state”, “ART bonus preparation state”, and “ART state”. For example, in the “normal state”, “no instruction” is transmitted as the content indicated by the instruction information command regarding the winning combination. Further, in the case of “artial bonus preparation state”, if the winning number “12” is “push order bell A”, “123” is transmitted as the content indicated by the instruction information command, and the winning number “13” is displayed. If “push order bell B” of “”, “132” is transmitted as the content indicated by the instruction information command, and if “push order bell C” of the winning number “14”, the content indicated by the instruction information command , “2” is transmitted, and “push order bell D” of the winning number “15” is transmitted, “312” is transmitted as the content indicated by the instruction information command, and “push order bell E” of the winning number “16” is transmitted. "321" is transmitted as the content indicated by the instruction information command, and "no instruction" is transmitted as the content indicated by the instruction information command for other winning combinations that can be won. It should be noted that the content “2” indicated by the instruction information command transmitted when the winning number “14” is “push order bell C” is operated next if the first stop button is the middle stop button 12. This indicates that the stop button and the stop button to be operated last are not important.

  In the case of “artial bonus preparation state”, if the “push order bell” is won, an instruction information command is transmitted. When notifying that “bonus” has been won through continuous production, the instruction information command of “no instruction” is transmitted during the continuous production of multiple games, or the instruction information command itself is not transmitted. To. Then, in the continuous performance, it is notified that “bonus” has been won, and when the “push order bell” is won in the game after the end of the continuous performance, “ The “instruction information command” may be transmitted. With this configuration, the instruction information is displayed on the payout number display unit 16 during the continuous production, so that “bonus” is won before the game notifying that “bonus” is won. Can be prevented.

  In the “ART state”, if the winning number “02” is “RT1 replay A”, “213” is transmitted as the content indicated by the instruction information command, and the winning number “03” “ If it is “RT1 replay B”, “231” is transmitted as the content indicated by the instruction information command, and if it is “RT1 replay C” of the winning number “04”, the content indicated by the instruction information command is “312”. ”Is transmitted and“ 321 replay during RT1 ”with the winning number“ 05 ”is transmitted,“ 321 ”is transmitted as the content indicated by the instruction information command, and“ replay during RT2 ”with the winning number“ 06 ”. For example, “1” is transmitted as the content indicated by the instruction information command, and “2” is transmitted as the content indicated by the instruction information command if “Replay B during RT2” of the winning number “07” is received. If it is “RT2 replay C” of the number “08”, “3” is transmitted as the content indicated by the instruction information command, and if it is “RT3 replay A” of the winning number “09”, the instruction information command is If “1” is transmitted as the content to be displayed and “Replay B during RT3” with the winning number “10”, “2” is transmitted as the content indicated by the instruction information command and “RT3 with the winning number“ 11 ”. If it is “medium replay C”, “3” is transmitted as the content indicated by the instruction information command. As described above, with regard to “RT2 replay” and “RT3 replay”, only the first stop button to be operated is determined, and if only the first stop button is matched, the next operation is performed. This indicates that the stop button and the stop button to be operated last are not important. The “push order bell” is configured to transmit the same instruction information command as that in the “artial bonus preparation state”, and thus the description thereof is omitted. Note that “no instruction” is transmitted as the contents indicated by the instruction information command for winning combinations other than these that can be won.

(Instruction production decision table)
Next, the instruction effect determination table will be described based on FIG.

  The instruction effect determination table is provided in the main ROM 302. In FIG. 18A, for example, when the state managed by the main control board 300 is “normal state”, the instruction effect determination table is determined by the main CPU 301. FIG. 18B shows an instruction effect. In FIG. 18B, as an example, states managed by the main control board 300 are “bonus preparation state” and “ART bonus preparation state” or “ART state”. It is a figure which shows the instruction | indication effect determined by main CPU301 in the case. The “instruction effect” defines an effect corresponding to one winning combination for one winning number or one winning combination for a plurality of winning numbers.

  In FIG. 18A, the instruction effect is determined based on the condition device command transmitted in one winning combination for one winning number described in the description of FIG. 17, and a plurality of winning numbers On the other hand, the instruction effect is determined based on the conditional device command transmitted in one winning combination. For example, if the winning number is “00” “losing”, “256/256” is determined to be “direction A” as the instruction effect, and if the winning number is “01” “normal replay”, “256” is determined. In “/ 256”, “Direction B” is determined as the instruction effect, and “Replay during RT1” of the winning number “02” to the winning number “05” is “64/256” as the instruction effect “ "Production C" is determined, "Production D" is determined as an instruction effect at "64/256", "Production E" is determined as an instruction effect at "64/256", and "64/256" The “effect F” is determined as the instruction effect.

  If the winning number “06” to the winning number “08” is “Replay during RT 2”, “Direction G” is determined as the instruction effect at “86/256”, and “85/256” “Direction H” is determined as the instruction effect, “Direction I” is determined as the instruction effect at “85/256”, and “Replay during RT3” of the winning number “09” to the winning number “11” is determined. If there is, “Direction J” is determined as an instruction effect at “86/256”, “Direction K” is determined as an instruction effect at “85/256”, and an instruction is indicated at “85/256”. “Production L” is determined as the production.

  If it is “push order bell”, “effect M” is determined as an instruction effect at “52/256”, “effect N” is determined as an instruction effect at “51/256”, and “ At “51/256”, “Direction O” is determined as the instruction effect, at “51/256”, “Direction P” is determined as the instruction effect, and at “51/256”, “Direction” Q "is determined. For other winning numbers, the instruction effect is determined in the same manner, but detailed description is omitted. Note that the sub control board 400 receives the “instruction effect command” from the main control board 300, and based on the received “instruction effect command”, the liquid crystal display device 31 and the LED 32 via the effect control board 500. A predetermined effect is executed using the speaker 33 or the like.

  On the other hand, in FIG. 18B, the instruction effect is determined based on the conditional device command transmitted by one winning combination for one winning number. For example, if the winning number is “00” “losing”, “256/256” is determined to be “direction A” as the instruction effect, and if the winning number is “01” “normal replay”, “256” is determined. "/ 256" determines "Direction B" as the instruction effect, and if the winning number "02" is "Replay A during RT1," determines "Direction C" as the instruction effect at "256/256" If it is “Replay B during RT1” with the winning number “03”, “Direction D” is determined as the instruction effect at “256/256”, and “Replay C during RT1” with the winning number “04”. If there is “256/256”, the “effect E” is determined as the instruction effect. If the winning number “05” is “RT1 replay D”, the instruction effect is “256/256”. “Direction F” is determined, and “No. If it is “Play A”, “Direction G” is determined as an instruction effect at “256/256”, and “Replay B during RT2” of the winning number “07” is “256/256”. “Direction H” is determined as the instruction effect, and if it is “Replay C in RT2” with the winning number “08”, “Direction I” is determined as the instruction effect at “256/256”, and the winning number “09” is determined. "Replay A during RT3" is determined as "Direction J" as the instruction effect at "256/256", and "256/256" when "Replay B during RT3" is selected for the winning number "10". In “256”, “effect K” is determined as the instruction effect, and if “winning number“ 11 ”is“ Replay C in RT3 ”,“ effect L ”is determined as the instruction effect in“ 256/256 ”. .

  If the winning number “12” is “push order bell A”, “255/256” determines “effect M” as the instruction effect, and “1/256” indicates “effect”. “R” is determined, and if the winning number “13” is “push order bell B”, “Direction N” is determined as “Direction N” at “255/256”, and Instruction is indicated at “1/256”. “Production R” is determined as the production, and if the winning number “14” is “push order bell C”, “Production O” is decided as the instruction production at “255/256” and “1/256”. Then, “Direction R” is determined as the instruction effect. If “Wind Order Bell D” of the winning number “15” is determined, “Direction P” is determined as the instruction effect at “255/256”. At 1/256 ”,“ Director R ”is determined as the instruction effect, and“ Push Order Bell E ”with the winning number“ 16 ”is selected. Lever, in the "255/256", to determine the "performance Q" as an instruction directed at "1/256", to determine the "directing R" as an indication director. For other winning numbers, the instruction effect is determined in the same manner, but detailed description is omitted. Note that the sub control board 400 receives the “instruction effect command” from the main control board 300, and based on the received “instruction effect command”, the liquid crystal display device 31 and the LED 32 via the effect control board 500. A predetermined effect is executed using the speaker 33 or the like. It should be noted that the “production R” can be won in any case when it is “push order bell”, and when “production R” is selected, the operation order described later in FIG. A game of hitting can be executed.

  That is, when the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “normal state”, the instruction effect is determined based on a group of conditional device commands, and the determined “instruction effect command” is the sub-control board 400. Therefore, even if you try to illegally analyze the “instruction production command” and acquire a medal illegally, you must know which winning number corresponds to the winning number. Becomes difficult. For example, even if the “instruction production command” is illegally analyzed and it is understood that the production corresponds to “push order bell”, any of “push order bell A” to “push order bell E” is selected. It is difficult to grasp whether or not a medal is obtained illegally. On the other hand, when the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “ART state”, since the operation order of the stop button is informed, the “instruction effect command” is analyzed and the medal is illegally obtained. The instruction effect can be determined based on the conditional device command transmitted by one winning combination for one winning number.

(Direction decision table)
Next, the effect determination table will be described based on FIG.

  The effect determination table is provided in the sub ROM 402 and is provided for determining effects to be performed in each state managed by the main control board 300. Specifically, “production No.” and production contents corresponding to “production No.” are defined. In the effect determination table, conditions for executing effects such as a state managed by the main control board 300 are defined. Here, in the present embodiment, the effect determination table includes a normal state effect determination table (see FIG. 19A) used when the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “normal state”, and the main control. The bonus preparation state effect determination table (see FIG. 19B) used when the state managed by the board 300 is the “bonus preparation state”, and the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “BB state”. BB state effect determination table used in the case (see FIG. 19C) and RB state effect determination table used when the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “RB state” (FIG. 19D )), And an ART preparation state effect determination table (FIG. 5) used when the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “ART preparation state”. 9 (E)), an ART state effect determination table (see FIG. 19F) used when the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “ART state”, and the main control board 300. When the state is “ART bonus preparation state”, the bonus determination state effect determination table for ART (not shown) and the state managed by the main control board 300 are “ART state BB state”. An ART BB state effect determination table (not shown) used, and an ART RB state effect determination table (not shown) used when the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “ART RB state”. ).

  For example, when the state managed by the main control board 300 is “normal state”, the sub CPU 401 in the sub control board 400 is based on the received conditional device command, instruction information command, and instruction effect command. The effect to be executed is determined with reference to the effect determination table (see FIG. 19A) provided in the sub ROM 402. On the other hand, when the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “ART state”, it is provided in the sub ROM 402 based on the received conditional device command, instruction information command, and instruction effect command. An effect to be executed is determined with reference to the effect determination table (see FIG. 19F).

(Program start processing by the main control board 300)
Next, a program start process performed by the main control board 300 will be described with reference to FIG. The program start process is a process performed based on the fact that the power switch 201sw is turned on.

(Step S1)
In step S <b> 1, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not power is interrupted. Specifically, when power is supplied to the gaming machine 1, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the gaming machine 1 is in a power interruption state, and when the power is not supplied to the gaming machine 1. In this case, a process for determining whether or not the gaming machine 1 is cut off by the backup power source is performed. If it is determined that the power is interrupted (step S1 = Yes), the process of step S1 is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the power is not interrupted (step S1 = No), the process proceeds to step S2.

(Step S2)
In step S2, the main CPU 301 performs an initial setting process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 sets a table address for setting the internal register of the gaming machine 1, and performs a process of setting the register address based on the table. Then, when the process of step S2 ends, the process proceeds to step S3.

(Step S3)
In step S3, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the setting change key switch is ON. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the setting change key (not shown) is rotated by a predetermined angle in the clockwise direction in a state where the setting change key (not shown) is inserted into the key hole for setting change. If it is determined that the setting change key switch is ON (step S3 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S4, and if it is determined that the setting change key switch is not ON (step S3). = No), the processing shifts to a power failure recovery process for restoring the value of the register saved before power interruption and the value of the saved stack pointer. When the power interruption recovery process is completed, the game machine 1 returns to the state when the power is turned off.

(Step S4)
In step S4, the main CPU 301 performs a setting value change process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 first acquires the current setting value based on the value stored in the setting value storage area provided in the main RAM 303, and determines whether the setting value range is normal. If the result of the determination is normal, the current setting value is displayed on a setting display section (not shown). On the other hand, when the above-described determination result is not normal, processing for setting the initial value of the setting value in the setting value storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is performed. Then, the main CPU 301 performs a process of switching the set value based on the detection of the operation of the setting change button (not shown) by the setting change switch (not shown), and the start lever 10 by the start switch 10sw. Based on the detected operation, a process for determining the set value is performed. Then, the setting change key (not shown) is inserted into the key hole for setting change, and has been turned a predetermined angle in the counterclockwise direction from the state rotated in the clockwise direction by a predetermined angle. When it is detected, processing for storing the set value in the set value storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is performed. Then, when the process of step S4 ends, the process proceeds to the main loop process (see FIG. 21).

(Main loop processing by the main control board 300)
Next, the main loop process performed by the main control board 300 will be described based on FIG.

(Step S101)
In step S101, the main CPU 301 performs an initialization process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 sets the stack pointer, sets the initialization start address and the initialization end address of the main RAM 303, and then initializes from the initialization start address to the initialization end address area of the main RAM 303. Processing for initializing the area is performed. Further, the main CPU 301 performs processing for clearing the value of the insertion number counter provided in the main RAM 303 and the value of the press reference position storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S101 ends, the process proceeds to step S102.

(Step S102)
In step S102, the main CPU 301 performs medal acceptance start processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “3” to the value of the insertion number counter provided in the main RAM 303 when a later-described re-game operation flag is ON. Then, when the process of step S102 ends, the process proceeds to step S103.

(Step S103)
In step S103, the main CPU 301 performs medal management processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not a medal has been inserted into the medal insertion slot 6 when a later-described re-game operation flag is not ON, and when the medal has been inserted into the medal insertion slot 6. In addition, a process for adding the value of the insertion number counter provided in the main RAM 303, whether or not an operation of the BET button 7 or the MAXBET button 8 is detected, and the operation of the BET button 7 or the MAXBET button 8 are determined. Is detected, the process of adding the value of the insertion number counter provided in the main RAM 303 is performed. Further, it is determined whether or not an operation of the settlement button 9 is detected, and when an operation of the settlement button 9 is detected, a process of returning the stored medal to the player is performed. Then, when the process of step S103 ends, the process proceeds to step S104.

(Step S104)
In step S <b> 104, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the insertion number counter is “3”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the value of the insertion number counter provided in the main RAM 303 has become “3” by the medal acceptance start process in step S102 and the medal management process in step S103. Process. If it is determined that the value of the inserted number counter is “3” (step S104 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S105, where it is determined that the value of the inserted number counter is not “3”. In this case (step S104 = No), the process proceeds to step S103.

(Step S105)
In step S105, the main CPU 301 performs a start lever check process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not an operation of the start lever is detected by the start switch 10sw, and is provided in the main RAM 303 when the operation of the start lever 10 is detected by the start switch 10sw. Processing for turning off the re-game operating flag in the re-game operating flag storage area is performed. On the other hand, when the operation of the start lever 10 is not detected by the start switch 10sw, the start lever check process is terminated. Then, when the process of step S105 ends, the process proceeds to step S106.

(Step S106)
In step S106, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the start switch is ON. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the start switch 10sw is ON. If it is determined that the start switch is ON (step S106 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S107. If it is determined that the start switch is not ON (step S106 = No), The process proceeds to step S103.

(Step S107)
In step S107, the main CPU 301 performs an internal lottery process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining a winning combination by lottery. Then, when the process of step S107 ends, the process proceeds to step S108.

(Step S108)
In step S108, the main CPU 301 performs a bonus information update process. Specifically, when the bonus is won by the internal lottery process in step S107, the main CPU 301 performs a process of updating the carry flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303 and is provided in the main RAM 303. A process for setting information related to the “fourth RT gaming state” in the gaming state storage area is performed. On the other hand, if the bonus is not won by the internal lottery process in step S107, the value stored in the carry flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303 and the winning combination storage area provided in the main RAM 303 are displayed. Is performed, and the result of the calculation is stored in a winning combination storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S108 ends, the process proceeds to step S109.

(Step S109)
In step S109, the main CPU 301 performs a process by start state, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In the processing, the main CPU 301 performs processing according to the state managed by the main control board 300. Then, when the process of step S109 ends, the process proceeds to step S110.

(Step S110)
In step S110, the main CPU 301 performs information setting processing which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 determines a condition device command according to the winning combination, determines instruction information according to the state, sets an instruction information command, and determines an instruction effect according to the condition device command. Then, processing for setting the instruction effect command is performed. Then, when the process of step S110 ends, the process proceeds to step S111.

(Step S111)
In step S111, the main CPU 301 performs reel rotation start preparation processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of executing the spinning effect based on information stored in the spinning effect information storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Further, the main CPU 301 performs a process for determining whether or not the minimum game time has elapsed. If it is determined that the minimum game time has elapsed as a result of the determination, the minimum game time has elapsed in the next game. In order to determine whether or not it has been performed, a process of setting a value of a timer counter provided in the main RAM 303 is performed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the minimum game time has not elapsed, the main CPU 301 performs a process of waiting until the minimum game time has elapsed. In addition, the main CPU 301 transmits the reel rotation start command having information indicating that the rotation of the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 is started to the sub control board 400. Is set in an effect transmission data storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S111 ends, the process proceeds to step S112.

(Step S112)
In step S112, the main CPU 301 performs a reel rotation start process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 drives the left stepping motor 151, the middle stepping motor 152, and the right stepping motor 153 via the reel control board 150 to determine the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20. Performs processing to rotate at high speed. Then, when the process of step S112 ends, the process proceeds to step S113.

(Step S113)
In step S113, the main CPU 301 performs a reel rotation process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the left stop button 11, middle stop button 12, and right stop button 13 are pressed, and the left stop button 11, middle stop button 12, and right stop button 13 are pressed. In the case of pressing, among the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13, the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, the right reel 20 and the left stepping motor 151 corresponding to the operated stop button. Then, based on the values of the pulse counters supplied to the middle stepping motor 152 and the right stepping motor 153, the pressing reference position is acquired and stored in the pressing reference position storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Next, the main CPU 301 has a stop table (not shown) provided in the main ROM 302, the value of the winning combination storage area provided in the main RAM 303, the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop. Based on the operation order of the button 13, etc., a process of determining the number of sliding frames within the range of “0” to “4” frames is performed, and the determined number of sliding frames is determined as a sliding frame provided in the main RAM 303. Processing to store in the number storage area. The main CPU 301 rotates based on the value stored in the pressing reference position storage area provided in the main RAM 303 and the value stored in the sliding frame number storage area provided in the main RAM 303. A process of stopping the middle left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 is performed. Then, when the process of step S113 ends, the process proceeds to step S114.

(Step S114)
In step S114, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not all reels have stopped. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 are all stopped by the reel rotation process in step S113. If it is determined that all reels have stopped (step S114 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S115. If it is determined that all reels have not stopped (step S114 = No), The process proceeds to step S113, and the same process is repeated until all reels stop.

(Step S115)
In step S115, the main CPU 301 performs display determination processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 first sends the display determination command to the main RAM 303 in order to transmit a display determination command having information on the combination of symbols displayed on the effective line to the sub-control board 400. Is set in the production transmission data storage area. Next, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not “a combination of symbols related to winning” is displayed on the active line, and determines that “a combination of symbols related to winning” is displayed on the active line. In the case of a game, a process for calculating the number of medals to be paid out to the player is performed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the “combination of symbols related to winning” is not displayed on the active line, a process is performed to determine whether or not the “combination of symbols related to replay” is displayed on the active line. When it is determined that the “combination of symbols related to replay” is displayed on the active line, a process of turning on the value of the re-game operating flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is performed. Then, when the process of step S115 ends, the process proceeds to step S116.

(Step S116)
In step S116, the main CPU 301 performs medal payout processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of paying out medals by driving the hopper 202 via the power supply board 200 based on the fact that “combination of symbols related to winning” is displayed on the active line. Do. Then, when the process of step S116 ends, the process proceeds to step S117.

(Step S117)
In step S117, the main CPU 301 performs a game state transition process that will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs a process of shifting the gaming state based on the combination of symbols displayed on the active line. Then, when the process of step S117 ends, the process proceeds to step S118.

(Step S118)
In step S <b> 118, the main CPU 301 performs processing according to display state, which will be described in detail later using FIG. 36. In the processing, the main CPU 301 performs processing according to the combination of the state managed by the main control board 300 and the symbols displayed on the active line. Then, when the process of step S118 ends, the process proceeds to step S101.

(Internal lottery process)
Next, the internal lottery process performed by the process of step S107 of FIG. 21 will be described based on FIG. FIG. 22 shows a subroutine of the internal lottery process.

(Step S107-1)
In step S107-1, the main CPU 301 performs a hard random number acquisition process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for extracting the random number value generated by the main random number generator 304 and processing for storing the extracted random number value in a register. Then, when the process of step S107-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S107-2.

(Step S107-2)
In step S107-2, the main CPU 301 performs a winning number initial value acquisition process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for obtaining an initial value of a winning number when determining a winning combination. Here, in the present embodiment, the main CPU 301 performs a process of acquiring “46” as the initial value of the winning number and storing it in the register. Then, when the process of step S107-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S107-3.

(Step S107-3)
In step S107-3, the main CPU 301 performs a gaming state acquisition process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for acquiring a gaming state based on the value of the gaming state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S107-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S107-4.

(Step S107-4)
In step S107-4, the main CPU 301 performs a winning combination determination table setting process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting a winning combination determination table provided in the main ROM 302 based on information related to the gaming state acquired in the gaming state acquisition process of step S107-3. Then, when the process of step S107-4 ends, the process proceeds to step S107-5.

(Step S107-5)
In step S107-5, the main CPU 301 performs a lottery data acquisition process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines the winning combination corresponding to the winning number based on the winning combination determination table set by the winning combination determination table setting process in step S107-4 and the winning number stored in the register. The process which acquires the data concerned is performed. Then, when the process of step S107-5 ends, the process proceeds to step S107-6.

(Step S107-6)
In step S107-6, the main CPU 301 performs a lottery value acquisition process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines the winning combination determination table currently set based on the value stored in the set value storage area provided in the main RAM 303 and the winning number stored in the register. A lottery value is acquired and stored in a register. Then, when the process of step S107-6 ends, the process proceeds to step S107-7.

(Step S107-7)
In step S107-7, the main CPU 301 performs a lottery confirmation process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 subtracts the lottery value acquired by the lottery value acquisition process in step S107-6 from the random number value stored in the register, and subtracts the value of the register in which the random number value is stored. The process of updating to the value after storage and storing it is performed. Then, when the process of step S107-7 ends, the process proceeds to step S107-8.

(Step S107-8)
In step S107-8, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the winning is made. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of subtracting the lottery value acquired by the lottery value acquisition process of step S107-6 from the random value stored in the register by the lottery confirmation process of step S107-7. Then, a process for determining whether or not the value is negative is performed. If it is determined that the winning combination is made (step S107-8 = Yes), the winning combination is determined based on the winning number stored in the register, and then the internal lottery processing subroutine is terminated, and the main loop processing is performed. The process proceeds to step S108. On the other hand, when it is determined that the winning is not made (step S107-8 = No), the process proceeds to step S107-9.

(Step S107-9)
In step S107-9, the main CPU 301 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the winning number. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the winning number stored in the register. Then, when the process of step S107-9 ends, the process proceeds to step S107-10.

(Step S107-10)
In step S107-10, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the value of the winning number is “0”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the value of the winning number is “0” as a result of subtracting “1” from the winning number value stored in the register by the process of step S107-9. Perform the process. If it is determined that the value of the winning number is “0” (step S107-10 = Yes), after “losing” is determined as the winning combination, the internal lottery processing subroutine is terminated, and the main loop The process proceeds to step S108 of the process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the winning number is not “0” (step S107-10 = No), the process proceeds to step S107-3.

(Processing by status at start)
Next, based on FIG. 23, a description will be given of the start-time state process performed by the process of step S109 of FIG. FIG. 23 is a diagram showing a subroutine of processing by state at start time.

(Step S109-1)
In step S <b> 109-1, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the “normal state” is set. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the “normal state” is based on a value stored in a state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. If it is determined that the state is “normal state” (step S109-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S109-2. If it is determined that the state is not “normal state” (step S109). -1 = No), the process proceeds to step S109-3.

(Step S109-2)
In step S109-2, the main CPU 301 performs a normal state process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, when the “bonus” is won, the main CPU 301 performs a process of shifting the state managed by the main control board 300 to the “bonus preparation state”. Then, when the process of step S109-2 is completed, the subroutine for the start-time state process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S110 of the main loop process.

(Step S109-3)
In step S109-3, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the “bonus preparation state”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not it is in the “bonus preparation state” based on a value stored in a state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. If it is determined that the state is “bonus preparation state” (step S109-3 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S109-4, and if it is determined that the state is not “bonus preparation state” (step S109-3 = Yes) Step S109-3 = No), the process proceeds to step S109-5.

(Step S109-4)
In step S109-4, the main CPU 301 performs a “bonus preparation state” process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 draws lots based on the normal state ART ready state transition lottery table (see FIG. 15A) provided in the main ROM 302, to determine whether or not to shift to the “ART ready state”. Perform processing. When the process of step S109-4 is completed, the subroutine for the start-time state process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S110 of the main loop process.

(Step S109-5)
In step S109-5, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the state is the “BB state”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the state is the “BB state” based on the value stored in the state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. When it is determined that the state is the BB state (step S109-5 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S109-6, and when it is determined that the state is not the “BB state” (step S109-5). = No), the process proceeds to step S109-7.

(Step S109-6)
In step S109-6, the main CPU 301 performs processing for the BB state, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 draws a lot on whether to shift to the “ART ready state” based on the BB state ART ready state shift lottery table (see FIG. 15B) provided in the main ROM 302. Perform processing. Then, when the process of step S109-6 is completed, the subroutine for the start-time state process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S110 of the main loop process.

(Step S109-7)
In step S109-7, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the state is the “RB state”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the state is the “RB state” based on a value stored in a state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. When it is determined that the state is “RB state” (step S109-7 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S109-8, and when it is determined that the state is not “RB state” (step S109). −7 = No), the process proceeds to step S109-9.

(Step S109-8)
In step S109-8, the main CPU 301 performs an RB state process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 draws lots whether or not to shift to the “ART ready state” based on the RB state ART ready state shift lottery table (see FIG. 15C) provided in the main ROM 302. Perform processing. Then, when the process of step S109-8 is completed, the subroutine for the start-time state process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S110 of the main loop process.

(Step S109-9)
In step S109-9, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the state is the “ART ready state”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not it is in the “ART ready state” based on a value stored in a state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. If it is determined that the state is “ART ready state” (step S109-9 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S109-10, and if it is determined that the state is not “ART ready state” ( Step S109-9 = No), the process proceeds to step S109-11.

(Step S109-10)
In step S109-10, the main CPU 301 performs an ART preparation state process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs a process of shifting the state managed by the main control board 300 to “a bonus preparation state during ART” when “bonus” is won. Then, when the process of step S109-10 is completed, the subroutine for the start-time state process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S110 of the main loop process.

(Step S109-11)
In step S109-11, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the state is the “ART state”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the state is the “ART state” based on a value stored in a state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. If it is determined that the state is the “ART state” (step S109-11 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S109-12, and if it is determined that the state is not the “ART state” (step S109). −11 = No), the process proceeds to step S109-13.

(Step S109-12)
In step S109-12, the main CPU 301 performs ART state processing, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not to add the number of games that can be played in the “ART state” based on the ART state extra lottery table provided in the main ROM 302 (see FIG. 16A). A lottery process is performed. Then, when the process of step S109-12 is completed, the subroutine of the start-time state process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S110 of the main loop process.

(Step S109-13)
In step S <b> 109-13, the main CPU 301 performs processing to determine whether or not it is in the “ART bonus preparation state”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not it is in the “ART bonus preparation state” based on a value stored in a state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. If it is determined that the state is “ART bonus preparation state” (step S109-13 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S109-14, and is determined not to be “ART bonus preparation state”. In this case (step S109-13 = No), the process proceeds to step S109-15.

(Step S109-14)
In step S109-14, the main CPU 301 performs a bonus preparation state process during ART, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not to add the number of games that can be played in the “ART state” based on the ART state extra lottery table provided in the main ROM 302 (see FIG. 16A). A lottery process is performed. Then, when the process of step S109-14 is completed, the subroutine for the start-time state process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S110 of the main loop process.

(Step S109-15)
In step S <b> 109-15, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the “ART state during BB”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the state is the “BB state during ART” based on a value stored in a state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. When it is determined that the state is the “BB state during ART” (step S109-15 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S109-16, and when it is determined that the state is not the “BB state during ART”. (Step S109-15 = No), the process proceeds to Step S109-17.

(Step S109-16)
In step S109-16, the main CPU 301 performs processing for the BB state during ART, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not to add the number of games that can be played in the “ART state” based on the bonus drawing state for bonus state during ART provided in the main ROM 302 (see FIG. 16B). The process etc. which draw a lot is performed. When the process of step S109-16 is completed, the subroutine for the start-time state process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S110 of the main loop process.

(Step S109-17)
In step S109-17, the main CPU 301 performs an RB state process during ART, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not to add the number of games that can be played in the “ART state” based on the bonus drawing state for bonus state during ART provided in the main ROM 302 (see FIG. 16B). The process etc. which draw a lot is performed. When the process of step S109-17 is completed, the subroutine for the start-time state process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S110 of the main loop process.

(Normal processing)
Next, based on FIG. 24, the normal state process performed by the process of step S109-2 of FIG. 23 will be described. FIG. 24 is a diagram showing a subroutine for normal state processing.

(Step S109-2-1)
In step S109-2-1, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the winning combination is “bonus”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the winning combination is “bonus” based on the value stored in the winning combination storing area provided in the main RAM 303. When it is determined that the winning combination is “bonus” (step S109-2-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S109-2-2, and it is determined that the winning combination is not “bonus”. If it is determined (step S109-2-1 = No), the process proceeds to step S109-2-3.

(Step S109-2-2)
In step S109-2-2, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting the state managed by the main control board 300 to the “bonus preparation state”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting information related to the “bonus preparation state” in a state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. When the process of step S109-2-2 ends, the normal state processing subroutine ends, and the process proceeds to step S110 of the main loop process.

(Step S109-2-3)
In step S109-2-3, the main CPU 301 performs an ART preparation state transition lottery process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 is stored in a normal state ART preparation state transition lottery table (see FIG. 15A) provided in the main ROM 302 and a winning combination storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Based on the value, a process for drawing whether or not to shift to the “ART ready state” is performed. Then, when the process of step S109-2-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-2-4.

(Step S109-2-4)
In step S109-2-4, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the winning is made. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not it is determined to shift to the “ART ready state” as a result of the lottery by the ART ready state shift lottery process in step S109-2-3. Here, in the present embodiment, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining that it has won when it is determined to shift to the “ART ready state”, and when it is not determined to shift to the “ART ready state” The process to determine that has not been won. If it is determined that the winning is made (step S109-2-4 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S109-2-5, and if it is determined that the winning is not made (step S109-2). -4 = No), the normal state processing subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S110 of the main loop processing.

(Step S109-2-5)
In step S109-2-5, the main CPU 301 performs a process of changing the state managed by the main control board 300 to the “ART preparation state”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting information related to the “ART ready state” in a state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. When the process of step S109-2-5 is completed, the normal state processing subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S110 of the main loop process.

(Bonus preparation status processing)
Next, the bonus preparation state process performed by the process of step S109-4 of FIG. 23 will be described based on FIG. FIG. 25 is a diagram showing a subroutine of bonus preparation state processing.

(Step S109-4-1)
In step S109-4-1, the main CPU 301 performs an ART preparation state transition lottery process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 is stored in a normal state ART preparation state transition lottery table (see FIG. 15A) provided in the main ROM 302 and a winning combination storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Based on the value, a process for drawing whether or not to shift to the “ART ready state” is performed. Then, when the process of step S109-4-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-4-2.

(Step S109-4-2)
In step S109-4-2, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not it has been won. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not it is determined to shift to the “ART ready state” as a result of the lottery by the ART ready state shift lottery process in step S109-4-1. Here, in the present embodiment, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining that it has won when it is determined to shift to the “ART ready state”, and when it is not determined to shift to the “ART ready state” The process to determine that has not been won. If it is determined that the winning is made (step S109-4-2 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S109-4-3. If it is determined that the winning is not made (step S109-4). -2 = No), the bonus preparation state process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S110 of the main loop process.

(Step S109-4-3)
In step S109-4-3, the main CPU 301 performs processing for turning on the ART winning flag. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of turning on the ART winning flag in the ART winning flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303. When the process of step S109-4-3 ends, the bonus preparation state process subroutine ends, and the process proceeds to step S110 of the main loop process.

(Process for BB state)
Next, based on FIG. 26, the process for BB state performed by the process of step S109-6 of FIG. 23 is demonstrated. FIG. 26 shows a subroutine for the BB state process.

(Step S109-6-1)
In step S109-6-1, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the ART winning flag is ON. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the ART winning flag is ON based on the value stored in the ART winning flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303. If it is determined that the ART winning flag is ON (step S109-6-1 = Yes), the subroutine for the BB state process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S110 of the main loop process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the ART winning flag is not ON (step S109-6-1 = No), the process proceeds to step S109-6-2.

(Step S109-6-2)
In step S109-6-2, the main CPU 301 performs an ART preparation state transition lottery process during BB. Specifically, the main CPU 301 is stored in the BB state ART preparation state transition lottery table (see FIG. 15B) provided in the main ROM 302 and the winning combination storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Based on the value, a process for drawing whether or not to shift to the “ART ready state” is performed. Then, when the process of step S109-6-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-6-3.

(Step S109-6-3)
In step S109-6-3, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not a winning is made. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not it is determined to shift to the “ART ready state” as a result of the lottery process by the ART ready state shifting lottery process during BB of step S109-6-2. . Here, in the present embodiment, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining that it has won when it is determined to shift to the “ART ready state”, and when it is not determined to shift to the “ART ready state” The process to determine that has not been won. If it is determined that the winning is made (step S109-6-3 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S109-6-4, and if it is determined that the winning is not made (step S109-6). -3 = No), the subroutine for the BB state process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S110 of the main loop process.

(Step S109-6-4)
In step S109-6-4, the main CPU 301 performs processing for turning on the ART winning flag. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of turning on the ART winning flag in the ART winning flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303. When the process of step S109-6-4 ends, the subroutine for the BB state process ends, and the process proceeds to step S110 of the main loop process.

(Process for RB state)
Next, based on FIG. 27, the process for RB state performed by the process of step S109-8 of FIG. 23 is demonstrated. FIG. 27 is a diagram showing a subroutine of RB state processing.

(Step S109-8-1)
In step S109-8-1, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the ART winning flag is ON. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the ART winning flag is ON based on the value stored in the ART winning flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303. If it is determined that the ART winning flag is ON (step S109-8-1 = Yes), the subroutine for the RB state process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S110 of the main loop process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the ART winning flag is not ON (step S109-8-1 = No), the process proceeds to step S109-8-2.

(Step S109-8-2)
In step S109-8-2, the main CPU 301 performs an ART preparation state transition lottery process during RB. Specifically, the main CPU 301 is stored in the RB state ART preparation state transition lottery table (see FIG. 15C) provided in the main ROM 302 and the winning combination storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Based on the value, a process for drawing whether or not to shift to the “ART ready state” is performed. Then, when the process of step S109-8-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-8-3.

(Step S109-8-3)
In step S109-8-3, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the winning is made. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not it is determined to shift to the “ART ready state” as a result of the lottery process by the ART ready state shifting lottery process during RB in step S109-8-2. . Here, in the present embodiment, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining that it has won when it is determined to shift to the “ART ready state”, and when it is not determined to shift to the “ART ready state” The process to determine that has not been won. If it is determined that the winning is made (step S109-8-3 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S109-8-4, and if it is determined that the winning is not made (step S109-8). -3 = No), the subroutine for the RB state process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S110 of the main loop process.

(Step S109-8-4)
In step S109-8-4, the main CPU 301 performs processing for turning on the ART winning flag. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of turning on the ART winning flag in the ART winning flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303. When the process of step S109-8-4 ends, the subroutine for the RB state process ends, and the process proceeds to step S110 of the main loop process.

(ART preparation status processing)
Next, based on FIG. 28, the ART preparation state process performed by the process of step S109-10 of FIG. 23 will be described. FIG. 28 is a diagram showing a subroutine for the ART preparation state processing.

(Step S109-10-1)
In step S109-10-1, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the winning combination is “bonus”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the winning combination is “bonus” based on the value stored in the winning combination storing area provided in the main RAM 303. If it is determined that the winning combination is “bonus” (step S109-10-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S109-10-2, and it is determined that the winning combination is not “bonus”. If it is determined (step S109-10-1 = No), the process proceeds to step S109-10-3.

(Step S109-10-2)
In step S <b> 109-10-2, the main CPU 301 performs a process of changing the state managed by the main control board 300 to the “ART bonus preparation state”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting information related to the “ART bonus preparation state” in a state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. When the processing of step S109-10-2 is completed, the ART preparation state processing subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S110 of the main loop processing.

(Step S109-10-3)
In step S109-10-3, the main CPU 301 adds the number of ART state games and performs a lottery process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 sets the value stored in the extra lottery table for ART state (see FIG. 16A) provided in the main ROM 302 and the winning combination storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Based on this, a process of drawing whether or not to increase the number of games that can be played in the “ART state” is performed. Then, when the process of step S109-10-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-10-4.

(Step S109-10-4)
In step S109-10-4, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the winning is made. Specifically, as a result of performing the lottery process for adding the number of ART state games in step S109-10-3, the main CPU 301 has decided to add the ART state game number counter provided in the main RAM 303. Processing to determine whether or not. Here, in this embodiment, when it is determined that the ART state game number counter provided in the main RAM 303 is to be added, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining that it has been won, and is provided in the main RAM 303. If it is not decided to add the ART state game number counter, the process of determining that the game is not won is performed. When it is determined that the winning is made (step S109-10-4 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S109-10-5, and when it is determined that the winning is not made (step S109-10). -4 = No), the ART ready state processing subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S110 of the main loop process.

(Step S109-10-5)
In step S109-10-5, the main CPU 301 performs an ART state game number counter addition process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 adds the number of ART state games in step S109-10-3 to the value stored in the ART state game number counter provided in the main RAM 303, and is determined by the lottery process. The process which adds is performed. When the process of step S109-10-5 ends, the ART preparation state processing subroutine ends, and the process proceeds to step S110 of the main loop process.

(ART status processing)
Next, the ART state process performed by the process of step S109-12 of FIG. 23 will be described based on FIG. FIG. 29 is a diagram showing a subroutine for the ART state processing.

(Step S109-12-1)
In step S109-12-1, the main CPU 301 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the ART state game number counter. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the ART state game number counter provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S109-12-1 is completed, the process proceeds to step S109-12-2.

(Step S109-12-2)
In step S109-12-2, the main CPU 301 adds the number of ART state games and performs a lottery process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 sets the value stored in the extra lottery table for ART state (see FIG. 16A) provided in the main ROM 302 and the winning combination storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Based on this, a process of drawing whether or not to increase the number of games that can be played in the “ART state” is performed. Then, when the process of step S109-12-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-12-3.

(Step S109-12-3)
In step S109-12-3, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not a winning is made. Specifically, as a result of performing the lottery process for adding the number of ART state games in step S109-12-2, the main CPU 301 has been determined to add the ART state game number counter provided in the main RAM 303. Processing to determine whether or not. Here, in this embodiment, when it is determined that the ART state game number counter provided in the main RAM 303 is to be added, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining that it has been won, and is provided in the main RAM 303. If it is not decided to add the ART state game number counter, the process of determining that the game is not won is performed. And when it determines with having won (step S109-12-3 = Yes), it transfers a process to step S109-12-4, and when it determines with having not been won (step S109-12) -3 = No), the process proceeds to step S109-12-5.

(Step S109-12-4)
In step S109-12-4, the main CPU 301 performs ART state game number counter addition processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 adds the number of ART state games in step S109-12-2 to the value stored in the ART state game number counter provided in the main RAM 303, and is determined by the lottery process. The process which adds is performed. Then, when the process of step S109-12-4 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-12-5.

(Step S109-12-5)
In step S109-12-5, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the winning combination is “bonus”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the winning combination is “bonus” based on the value stored in the winning combination storing area provided in the main RAM 303. If it is determined that the winning combination is “bonus” (step S109-12-5 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S109-12-6, and it is determined that the winning combination is not “bonus”. If it is determined (step S109-12-5 = No), the process proceeds to step S109-12-7.

(Step S109-12-6)
In step S <b> 109-12-6, the main CPU 301 performs a process of changing the state managed by the main control board 300 to “ART bonus preparation state”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting information related to the “ART bonus preparation state” in a state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. When the process of step S109-12-6 is completed, the ART state subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S110 of the main loop process.

(Step S109-12-7)
In step S109-12-7, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the ART state game number counter is “0”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 subtracts “1” from the value of the ART state game number counter provided in the main RAM 303 by the process of step S109-12-1, and as a result, provides the ART provided in the main RAM 303. Processing for determining whether or not the value of the state game number counter is “0” is performed. If it is determined that the value of the ART state game number counter is “0” (step S109-12-7 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S109-12-8 to display the ART state game. If it is determined that the value of the number counter is not “0” (step S109-12-7 = No), the ART state processing subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S110 of the main loop process.

(Step S109-12-8)
In step S109-12-8, the main CPU 301 performs processing for changing the state managed by the main control board 300 to the “normal state”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting information related to the “normal state” in a state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. When the process of step S109-12-8 ends, the subroutine for the ART state process ends, and the process proceeds to step S110 of the main loop process.

(Process for bonus preparation status during ART)
Next, based on FIG. 30, the bonus preparation state process during ART performed by the process of step S109-14 of FIG. 23 will be described. FIG. 30 is a diagram showing a subroutine of processing for bonus preparation state during ART.

(Step S109-14-1)
In step S109-14-1, the main CPU 301 adds the number of ART state games and performs a lottery process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 sets the value stored in the extra lottery table for ART state (see FIG. 16A) provided in the main ROM 302 and the winning combination storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Based on this, a process of drawing whether or not to increase the number of games that can be played in the “ART state” is performed. Then, when the process of step S109-14-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-14-2.

(Step S109-14-2)
In step S109-14-2, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the winning is made. Specifically, as a result of performing the lottery process for adding the number of ART state games in step S109-14-1, the main CPU 301 has decided to add the ART state game number counter provided in the main RAM 303. Processing to determine whether or not. Here, in this embodiment, when it is determined that the ART state game number counter provided in the main RAM 303 is to be added, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining that it has been won, and is provided in the main RAM 303. If it is not decided to add the ART state game number counter, the process of determining that the game is not won is performed. If it is determined that the winning is made (step S109-14-2 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S109-14-3, and if it is determined that the winning is not made (step S109-14). -2 = No), the bonus preparation state processing subroutine during ART is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S110 of the main loop processing.

(Step S109-14-3)
In step S109-14-3, the main CPU 301 performs ART state game number counter addition processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 adds the number of ART state games in step S109-14-1 to the value stored in the ART state game number counter provided in the main RAM 303, and the value determined by the lottery process. The process which adds is performed. When the process of step S109-14-3 is completed, the ART bonus preparation state subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S110 of the main loop process.

(Process for BB status during ART)
Next, the processing for the BB state during ART performed by the processing of step S109-16 in FIG. 23 will be described based on FIG. FIG. 31 is a diagram showing a subroutine of processing for the BB state during ART.

(Step S109-16-1)
In step S109-16-1, the main CPU 301 performs a lottery process by adding the number of bonus games for the ART state. Specifically, the main CPU 301 is stored in the bonus bonus extra lottery table (see FIG. 16B) provided in the main ROM 302 and the winning combination storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Based on the value, a process of drawing whether or not to increase the number of games that can be played in the “ART state” is performed. Then, when the process of step S109-16-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-16-2.

(Step S109-16-2)
In step S109-16-2, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not a winning is made. Specifically, the main CPU 301 decides to add an ART state game number counter provided in the main RAM 303 as a result of performing the lottery process for adding the number of bonus ART state games in step S109-16-1. The process which determines whether it was carried out is performed. Here, in this embodiment, when it is determined that the ART state game number counter provided in the main RAM 303 is to be added, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining that it has been won, and is provided in the main RAM 303. If it is not decided to add the ART state game number counter, the process of determining that the game is not won is performed. And when it determines with having won (step S109-16-2 = Yes), it transfers a process to step S109-16-3, and when it determines with having not been won (step S109-16) -2 = No), the subroutine for the BB state process during ART is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S110 of the main loop process.

(Step S109-16-3)
In step S109-16-3, the main CPU 301 performs ART state game number counter addition processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines the value stored in the ART state game number counter provided in the main RAM 303 by adding the number of bonus ART state games in step S109-16-1 and performing a lottery process. Add the values. When the process of step S109-16-3 is completed, the ART BB state process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S110 of the main loop process.

(Process for RB status during ART)
Next, based on FIG. 32, the processing for the RB state during ART performed by the processing of step S109-17 of FIG. 23 will be described. FIG. 32 is a diagram showing a subroutine of processing for the RB state during ART.

(Step S109-17-1)
In step S109-17-1, the main CPU 301 performs a lottery process by adding the number of bonus games for the ART state. Specifically, the main CPU 301 is stored in the bonus bonus extra lottery table (see FIG. 16B) provided in the main ROM 302 and the winning combination storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Based on the value, a process of drawing whether or not to increase the number of games that can be played in the “ART state” is performed. Then, when the process of step S109-17-1 is completed, the process proceeds to step S109-17-2.

(Step S109-17-2)
In step S109-17-2, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not a winning is made. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines to add an ART state game number counter provided in the main RAM 303 as a result of performing the lottery process for adding the number of games for bonus ART state in step S109-17-1. The process which determines whether it was carried out is performed. Here, in this embodiment, when it is determined that the ART state game number counter provided in the main RAM 303 is to be added, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining that it has been won, and is provided in the main RAM 303. If it is not decided to add the ART state game number counter, the process of determining that the game is not won is performed. If it is determined that the winning is made (step S109-17-2 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S109-17-3, and if it is determined that the winning is not made (step S109-17). -2 = No), the subroutine for the RB state process during ART is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S110 of the main loop process.

(Step S109-17-3)
In step S109-17-3, the main CPU 301 performs an ART state game number counter addition process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines the value stored in the ART state game number counter provided in the main RAM 303 by adding the number of bonus ART state games in step S109-17-1 by lottery processing. Add the values. When the process of step S109-17-3 is completed, the ART RB state process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S110 of the main loop process.

(Information setting process)
Next, based on FIG. 33, the information setting process performed by the process of step S110 of FIG. 21 will be described. FIG. 33 is a diagram showing a subroutine of information setting processing.

(Step S110-1)
In step S110-1, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the winning combination is “RT1 replay”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the winning combination is “Replay during RT1” based on the value stored in the winning combination storing area provided in the main RAM 303. I do. If it is determined that the winning combination is “Replay during RT1” (Step S110-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to Step S110-2, and the winning combination is “Replay during RT1”. If it is determined that neither of them is satisfied (step S110-1 = No), the process proceeds to step S110-3.

(Step S110-2)
In step S110-2, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “RT1 replay” as the conditional device command. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting the conditional device command in the effect transmission data storage area provided in the main RAM 303 in order to transmit the conditional device command to the sub-control board 400. . That is, regardless of the state managed by the main control board 300 (for example, “normal state”, “ART state”), the “replay during RT1” with the winning number values “02” to “05” The command is transmitted as “Replay during RT1”. Then, when the process of step S110-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S110-10.

(Step S110-3)
In step S110-3, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the winning combination is “RT2 replay”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the winning combination is “Replay during RT2” based on the value stored in the winning combination storage area provided in the main RAM 303. I do. If it is determined that the winning combination is “Replay during RT2” (Step S110-3 = Yes), the process proceeds to Step S110-4, and the winning combination is “Replay during RT2”. If it is determined that neither of them is satisfied (step S110-3 = No), the process proceeds to step S110-5.

(Step S110-4)
In step S110-4, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “RT2 replay” as the conditional device command. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting the conditional device command in the effect transmission data storage area provided in the main RAM 303 in order to transmit the conditional device command to the sub-control board 400. . That is, regardless of the state managed by the main control board 300 (for example, “normal state”, “ART state”), the “replay during RT2” with the winning number values “06” to “08” As a command, “RT2 replay” is transmitted. Then, when the process of step S110-4 ends, the process proceeds to step S110-10.

(Step S110-5)
In step S110-5, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the winning combination is any of “Replay during RT3”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the winning combination is “Replay during RT3” based on the value stored in the winning combination storage area provided in the main RAM 303. I do. If it is determined that the winning combination is “Replay during RT3” (Step S110-5 = Yes), the process proceeds to Step S110-6, and the winning combination is “Replay during RT3”. If it is determined that neither of them is satisfied (step S110-5 = No), the process proceeds to step S110-7.

(Step S110-6)
In step S110-6, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “RT3 replay” as the conditional device command. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting the conditional device command in the effect transmission data storage area provided in the main RAM 303 in order to transmit the conditional device command to the sub-control board 400. . That is, regardless of the state managed by the main control board 300 (for example, “normal state”, “ART state”), the “replay during RT3” with the winning number values “09” to “11” The command is transmitted as “Replay during RT3”. Then, when the process of step S110-6 ends, the process proceeds to step S110-10.

(Step S110-7)
In step S110-7, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the winning combination is any of “push order bells”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the winning combination is any of “push order bells” based on the value stored in the winning combination storing area provided in the main RAM 303. I do. If it is determined that the winning combination is “push order bell” (step S110-7 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S110-8, and the winning combination is “push order bell”. If it is determined that neither of them is satisfied (step S110-7 = No), the process proceeds to step S110-9.

(Step S110-8)
In step S110-8, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “push order bell” as the conditional device command. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting the conditional device command in the effect transmission data storage area provided in the main RAM 303 in order to transmit the conditional device command to the sub-control board 400. . That is, regardless of the state managed by the main control board 300 (for example, “normal state”, “ART bonus preparation state”, “ART state”), the winning number values “12” to “16” The “push order bell” is transmitted as the “push order bell” as the conditional device command. Then, when the process of step S110-8 ends, the process proceeds to step S110-10.

(Step S110-9)
In step S110-9, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a corresponding conditional device command. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting the conditional device command in the effect transmission data storage area provided in the main RAM 303 in order to transmit the conditional device command to the sub-control board 400. . That is, a conditional device command corresponding to a winning number other than “push order replay” or “push order bell” is set in this process. For example, when the value stored in the winning combination storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is a value corresponding to “normal replay”, “normal replay” is set as the conditional device command. Then, when the process of step S110-9 ends, the process proceeds to step S110-10.

(Step S110-10)
In step S110-10, the main CPU 301 performs instruction information determination processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 instructs based on the value stored in the winning combination storage area provided in the main RAM 303 and the value stored in the state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Process to determine information. For example, as shown in FIG. 17, the value stored in the winning combination storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is a value corresponding to “push order bell A”, and the state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. If the value stored in is a value indicating “normal state”, “no instruction” is determined as instruction information. On the other hand, the value stored in the winning combination storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is a value corresponding to “push order bell A”, and the value stored in the state storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is “ When the value indicates “ART state”, “123” is determined as the instruction information. Then, when the process of step S110-10 ends, the process proceeds to step S110-11.

(Step S110-11)
In step S110-11, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting an instruction information command. Specifically, the main CPU 301 provides the instruction information command in the main RAM 303 in order to transmit the instruction information command to the sub control board 400 based on the instruction information determined in the process of step S110-10. The transmission processing data storage area is set. For example, if “123” is determined as the instruction information in the process of step S110-10, an instruction information command indicating the instruction information “123” is set. In the sub control board 400, the instruction information command , For example, using the liquid crystal display device 31 via the effect control board 500, the left stop button 11 is first operated, the middle stop button 12 is then operated, and the right stop button 13 is lastly operated. An image notifying that the operation is performed is displayed. Then, when the process of step S110-11 ends, the process proceeds to step S110-12.

(Step S110-12)
In step S110-12, the main CPU 301 performs instruction effect determination processing. Specifically, based on the value stored in the state storage area provided in the main RAM 303, the main CPU 301 is in the “normal state” or in the “ART bonus preparation state”. Or “ART state”, and processing for determining the instruction effect according to the state is performed. For example, when the value stored in the state storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is a value indicating “normal state”, step S110-2, step S110-4, or step S110-6. Or, referring to the instruction effect determination table (see FIG. 18A) provided in the main ROM 302 based on the conditional device command set in step S110-8 or step S110-9, the instruction effect To decide. On the other hand, when the value stored in the state storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is a value indicating “ART bonus preparation state” or “ART state”, the winning combination provided in the main RAM 303 is displayed. Based on the value stored in the storage area, the instruction effect is determined with reference to the instruction effect determination table (see FIG. 18B) provided in the main ROM 302.

  For example, if the value stored in the state storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is a value indicating “normal state” and “replay during RT1” is set in step S110-2, the value is stored in the main ROM 302. Refer to the location of “Replay during RT1” in the provided instruction effect determination table (see FIG. 18A), and select from “Production C”, “Production D”, “Production E”, and “Production F”. One of the effects will be determined. When the value stored in the state storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is a value indicating the “ART state”, the value stored in the winning combination storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is set. For example, if the value stored in the winning combination storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is a value corresponding to “push order bell A”, any one of “effect M” and “effect R” is selected. Will be determined. Then, when the process of step S110-12 ends, the process proceeds to step S110-13.

(Step S110-13)
In step S110-13, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting an instruction effect command. Specifically, the main CPU 301 provides the instruction effect command in the main RAM 303 in order to transmit the instruction effect command to the sub control board 400 based on the instruction effect determined in the process of step S110-12. The transmission processing data storage area is set. For example, in the process of step S110-12, when “effect M” is determined as the instruction effect, an instruction effect command indicating the instruction effect “effect M” is set. By receiving the effect command, for example, an image based on “effect M” is displayed using the liquid crystal display device 31 via the effect control board 500. Note that the sub-control board 400 may be configured to execute an effect after determining a further refined effect based on the received instruction effect command. When the process of step S110-13 ends, the information setting process subroutine ends, and the process proceeds to step S111 of the main loop process.

(Game state transition process)
Next, based on FIG. 34, the game state transition process performed by the process of step S117 of FIG. 21 will be described. FIG. 34 is a diagram showing a subroutine of the game state transition process.

(Step S117-1)
In step S117-1, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the bonus operating flag is ON. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether at least one of the BB operating flag and the RB operating flag in the bonus operating flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is ON. Here, in the present embodiment, the main CPU 301 determines that the bonus is obtained when at least one of the BB operating flag and the RB operating flag in the bonus operating flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is ON. Processing for determining that the operating flag is ON is performed, and when the BB operating flag and the RB operating flag in the bonus operating flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303 are OFF, the bonus operating flag is A process for determining that it is not ON is performed. When it is determined that the bonus operating flag is ON (step S117-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S117-2, and when it is determined that the bonus operating flag is not ON. (Step S117-1 = No), the process proceeds to Step S117-3.

(Step S117-2)
In step S117-2, the main CPU 301 performs a bonus operating process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs a process of subtracting the value of the payout number counter provided in the main RAM 303. When the process of step S117-2 is completed, the gaming state transition process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S118 of the main loop process.

(Step S117-3)
In step S117-3, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not “the combination of symbols related to the first RT gaming state transition replay” is displayed on the active line. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not “the combination of symbols related to the first RT gaming state transition replay” is displayed on the active line. If it is determined that “the combination of symbols related to the first RT gaming state transition replay” is displayed on the active line (step S117-3 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S117-4, When it is determined that the “combination of symbols related to 1RT gaming state transition replay” is not displayed on the active line (step S117-3 = No), the process proceeds to step S117-5.

(Step S117-4)
In step S117-4, the main CPU 301 performs a process of shifting the gaming state to the “first RT gaming state”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting information related to the “first RT gaming state” in the gaming state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. When the process of step S117-4 is completed, the gaming state transition process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S118 of the main loop process.

(Step S117-5)
In step S117-5, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not “a combination of symbols related to the second RT gaming state transition replay” is displayed on the active line. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not “the combination of symbols related to the second RT gaming state transition replay” is displayed on the active line. When it is determined that “the combination of symbols related to the second RT gaming state transition replay” is displayed on the active line (step S117-5 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S117-6, If it is determined that the “combination of symbols relating to 2RT gaming state transition replay” is not displayed on the active line (step S117-5 = No), the process proceeds to step S117-7.

(Step S117-6)
In step S117-6, the main CPU 301 performs a process of shifting the gaming state to the “second RT gaming state”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting information related to the “second RT gaming state” in the gaming state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. When the process of step S117-6 ends, the gaming state transition process subroutine ends, and the process proceeds to step S118 of the main loop process.

(Step S117-7)
In step S117-7, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not “the combination of symbols related to the third RT gaming state transition replay” is displayed on the active line. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not “a combination of symbols relating to the third RT gaming state transition replay” is displayed on the active line. If it is determined that “the combination of symbols related to the third RT gaming state transition replay” is displayed on the active line (step S117-7 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S117-8, If it is determined that the “combination of symbols related to 3RT gaming state transition replay” is not displayed on the active line (step S117-7 = No), the process proceeds to step S117-9.

(Step S117-8)
In step S117-8, the main CPU 301 performs a process of shifting the gaming state to the “third RT gaming state”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting information related to the “third RT gaming state” in the gaming state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. When the process of step S117-8 ends, the gaming state transition process subroutine ends, and the process proceeds to step S118 of the main loop process.

(Step S117-9)
In step S117-9, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the symbol combination related to the bonus is displayed on the active line. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not “the combination of symbols related to the bonus” is displayed on the active line. If it is determined that the symbol combination related to the bonus is displayed on the active line (step S117-9 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S117-10, and the symbol combination related to the bonus is determined to be the active line. If it is determined that it is not displayed above (step S117-9 = No), the gaming state transition process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S118 of the main loop process.

(Step S117-10)
In step S117-10, the main CPU 301 performs a bonus operating flag update process. Specifically, when the “combination of symbols related to BB” is displayed on the active line, the main CPU 301 turns on the BB operating flag in the bonus operating flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303. When the “RB combination” is displayed on the active line, the RB operating flag in the bonus operating flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is turned ON. . Then, when the process of step S117-10 ends, the process proceeds to step S117-11.

(Step S117-11)
In step S117-11, the main CPU 301 performs a bonus operation process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 sets a predetermined value to the value of the payout number counter provided in the main RAM 303 when “the combination of symbols related to BB” is displayed on the active line. , A process of clearing the value of the carry flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303, a process of setting the value of the game possible number counter provided in the main RAM 303, and a winning number counter provided in the main RAM 303 A process of setting a value and a process of setting information relating to the “RB gaming state” in the gaming state storage area provided in the main RAM 303 are performed. On the other hand, when “the combination of symbols related to RB” is displayed on the active line, the process of clearing the value of the carry flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303 and the game available in the main RAM 303 are possible. The process of setting the value of the number counter, the process of setting the value of the winning number counter provided in the main RAM 303, and the information related to the “RB gaming state” are set in the gaming state storage area provided in the main RAM 303 Perform the process. When the process of step S117-11 is completed, the gaming state transition process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S118 of the main loop process.

(Processing during bonus operation)
Next, based on FIG. 35, the bonus operating process performed by the process of step S117-2 of FIG. 34 will be described. FIG. 35 is a diagram showing a subroutine of processing during bonus operation.

(Step S117-2-1)
In step S117-2-1, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the BB operating flag is ON. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the BB operating flag in the bonus operating flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is ON. If it is determined that the BB operating flag is ON (step S117-2-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S117-2-2, and it is determined that the BB operating flag is not ON. If it is determined (step S117-2-1 = No), the process proceeds to step S117-2-11.

(Step S117-2-2)
In step S117-2-2, the main CPU 301 performs a payout number counter update process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for subtracting the number of paid-out medals calculated by the display determination processing in step S115 from the value of the paid-out number counter provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S117-2-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S117-2-3.

(Step S117-2-3)
In step S117-2-3, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the payout number counter is less than “0”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 pays out medals calculated by the display determination process in step S115 from the value of the payout number counter provided in the main RAM 303 by the payout number counter update process in step S117-2-2. As a result of subtracting the number of sheets, processing is performed to determine whether or not the value of the payout number counter has become a negative value. If it is determined that the value of the payout number counter is less than “0” (step S117-2-3 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S117-2-4, and the value of the payout number counter is If it is determined that it is not less than “0” (step S117-2-3 = No), the process proceeds to step S117-2-5.

(Step S117-2-4)
In step S117-2-4, the main CPU 301 performs processing at the end of BB. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for clearing the value of the payout number counter provided in the main RAM 303 and the value of the bonus operating flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303, and is provided in the main RAM 303. The process which sets the information which concerns on "the 1st RT game state" in the game state storage area currently set is performed. When the process of step S117-2-4 ends, the subroutine for the bonus operating process ends, and the process proceeds to step S118 of the main loop process.

(Step S117-2-5)
In step S117-2-5, the main CPU 301 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the possible game number counter. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the possible game number counter provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when step S117-2-5 is completed, the process proceeds to step S117-2-6.

(Step S117-2-6)
In step S117-2-6, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the possible game number counter is “0”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 subtracts “1” from the value of the game possible number counter provided in the main RAM 303 by the process of step S117-2-5, and as a result, the number of possible games provided in the main RAM 303 is obtained. Processing for determining whether or not the value of the counter is “0” is performed. If it is determined that the value of the game possible number counter is “0” (step S117-2-6 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S117-2-10, and the value of the game possible number counter is set. Is determined not to be “0” (step S117-2-6 = No), the process proceeds to step S117-2-7.

(Step S117-2-7)
In step S117-2-7, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not a prize has been won. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not “a combination of symbols related to winning” is displayed on the active line. If it is determined that a prize has been won (step S117-2-7 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S117-2-8. If it is determined that no prize has been awarded (step S117-2). −7 = No), the bonus operating process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S118 of the main loop process.

(Step S117-2-8)
In step S117-2-8, the main CPU 301 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the winning number counter. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the winning number counter provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S117-2-8 ends, the process proceeds to step S117-2-9.

(Step S117-2-9)
In step S117-2-9, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the winning number counter is “0”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 subtracts “1” from the value of the winning number counter provided in the main RAM 303 by the process of step S117-2-8. Processing for determining whether or not the value is “0” is performed. When it is determined that the value of the winning number counter is “0” (step S117-2-9 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S117-2-10, and the value of the winning number counter is “ If it is determined that it is not “0” (step S117-2-9 = No), the subroutine during the bonus operation process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S118 of the main loop process.

(Step S117-2-10)
In step S117-2-10, the main CPU 301 performs processing during RB operation during BB. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting a predetermined value in a winning number counter provided in the main RAM 303 and a process of setting a predetermined value in a possible game number counter provided in the main RAM 303. I do. When the process of step S117-2-10 is completed, the subroutine for the bonus operating process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S118 of the main loop process.

(Step S117-2-11)
In step S117-2-11, the main CPU 301 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the possible game number counter. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the possible game number counter provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S117-2-11 ends, the process proceeds to step S117-2-12.

(Step S117-2-12)
In step S117-2-12, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the game possible number counter is “0”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 subtracts “1” from the value of the game possible number counter provided in the main RAM 303 by the process of step S117-2-11, and as a result, the number of possible games provided in the main RAM 303. Processing for determining whether or not the value of the counter is “0” is performed. If it is determined that the value of the game possible number counter is “0” (step S117-2-12 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S117-2-16, and the value of the game possible number counter is set. Is determined not to be “0” (step S117-2-12 = No), the process proceeds to step S117-2-13.

(Step S117-2-13)
In step S117-2-13, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not a prize has been won. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not “a combination of symbols related to winning” is displayed on the active line. If it is determined that a prize has been won (step S117-2-13 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S117-2-14, and if it is determined that a prize has not been won (step S117-2). -13 = No), the bonus operating process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S118 of the main loop process.

(Step S117-2-14)
In step S117-2-14, the main CPU 301 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the winning number counter. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the winning number counter provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S117-2-14 ends, the process proceeds to step S117-2-15.

(Step S117-2-15)
In step S117-2-15, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the winning number counter is “0”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 subtracts “1” from the value of the winning number counter provided in the main RAM 303 by the process of step S117-2-14, and as a result, the main CPU 301 determines the number of winning number counters provided in the main RAM 303. Processing for determining whether or not the value is “0” is performed. When it is determined that the value of the winning number counter is “0” (step S117-2-15 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S117-2-16, and the value of the winning number counter is “ If it is determined that the value is not “0” (step S117-2-15 = No), the subroutine for the bonus operating process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S118 of the main loop process.

(Step S117-2-16)
In step S117-2-16, the main CPU 301 performs an RB end process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting information related to the “first RT gaming state” in the gaming state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. When the process of step S117-2-16 ends, the subroutine for the bonus operating process ends, and the process proceeds to step S118 of the main loop process.

(Processing by display status)
Next, based on FIG. 36, the processing according to the state at the time of display performed by the process of step S118 of FIG. 21 will be described. FIG. 36 is a diagram showing a subroutine of processing by state at the time of display.

(Step S118-1)
In step S <b> 118-1, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not it is in the “bonus preparation state”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not it is in the “bonus preparation state” based on a value stored in a state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. If it is determined that the state is the “bonus preparation state” (step S118-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S118-2, and if it is determined that the state is not the “bonus preparation state” ( Step S118-1 = No), the process proceeds to step S118-3.

(Step S118-2)
In step S 118-2, the main CPU 301 performs a display bonus preparation state process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs a process of shifting the state managed by the main control board 300 to the “BB state” when “the combination of symbols related to BB” is displayed on the active line, When the “symbol combination” is displayed on the active line, the state managed by the main control board 300 is transferred to the “RB state”. Then, when the process of step S118-2 is completed, the subroutine of the display state process is ended, and the process proceeds to step S101 of the main loop process.

(Step S118-3)
In step S118-3, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the state is the “BB state”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the state is the “BB state” based on the value stored in the state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. If it is determined that the state is “BB state” (step S118-3 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S118-4, and if it is determined that the state is not “BB state” (step S118). -3 = No), the process proceeds to step S118-5.

(Step S118-4)
In step S118-4, the main CPU 301 performs a display-time BB state process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this processing, the main CPU 301 sets the state managed by the main control board 300 as “ART ready state” when the ART winning flag in the ART winning flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is ON at the end of BB. Or when the ART winning flag in the ART winning flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is OFF, the state managed by the main control board 300 is changed to the “normal state”. Then, when the process of step S118-4 is completed, the subroutine of the display state process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S101 of the main loop process.

(Step S118-5)
In step S118-5, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the state is the “RB state”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the state is the “RB state” based on a value stored in a state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. When it is determined that the state is “RB state” (step S118-5 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S118-6, and when it is determined that the state is not “RB state” (step S118). -5 = No), the process proceeds to step S118-7.

(Step S118-6)
In step S118-6, the main CPU 301 performs a display time RB state process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 sets the state managed by the main control board 300 to “ART ready state” when the ART winning flag in the ART winning flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is ON at the end of the RB. Or when the ART winning flag in the ART winning flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is OFF, the state managed by the main control board 300 is changed to the “normal state”. Then, when the process of step S118-6 is completed, the subroutine of the display time state process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S101 of the main loop process.

(Step S118-7)
In step S118-7, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the state is the “ART ready state”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not it is in the “ART ready state” based on a value stored in a state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. If it is determined that the state is “ART ready state” (step S118-7 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S118-8, and if it is determined that the state is not “ART ready state” ( Step S118-7 = No), the process proceeds to step S118-9.

(Step S118-8)
In step S118-8, the main CPU 301 performs a display-time ART preparation state process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs a process of shifting the state managed by the main control board 300 to the “ART state” when “the combination of symbols relating to the third RT gaming state transition replay” is displayed on the active line. I do. Then, when the process of step S118-8 is completed, the subroutine for the display state process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S101 of the main loop process.

(Step S118-9)
In step S <b> 118-9, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not it is in the “ART bonus preparation state”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not it is in the “ART bonus preparation state” based on a value stored in a state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. If it is determined that the state is “ART bonus preparation state” (step S118-9 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S118-10, and is determined not to be “ART bonus preparation state”. In that case (step S118-9 = No), the process proceeds to step S118-11.

(Step S118-10)
In step S118-10, the main CPU 301 performs a bonus preparation state process during ART during display, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs a process of shifting the state managed by the main control board 300 to the “BB state during ART” when “the combination of symbols related to BB” is displayed on the active line, When the “combination of symbols relating to RB” is displayed on the active line, the state managed by the main control board 300 is transferred to the “RB state during ART”. Then, when the process of step S118-10 is completed, the subroutine of the display state process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S101 of the main loop process.

(Step S118-11)
In step S <b> 118-11, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not it is in the “ART BB state”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the state is the “BB state during ART” based on a value stored in a state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. If it is determined that the state is the “BB state during ART” (step S118-11 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S118-12, and if it is determined that the state is not the “BB state during ART”. (Step S118-11 = No), the process proceeds to Step S118-13.

(Step S118-12)
In step S118-12, the main CPU 301 performs processing for the BB state during ART during display, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs a process of changing the state managed by the main control board 300 to the “ART preparation state” at the end of the BB. Then, when the process of step S118-12 is completed, the subroutine of the display time state process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S101 of the main loop process.

(Step S118-13)
In step S118-13, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the state is the “RB state during ART”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the state is the “RB state during ART” based on the value stored in the state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. When it is determined that the state is the “RB state during ART” (step S118-13 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S118-14, and when it is determined that the state is not the “RB state during ART”. (Step S118-13 = No) ends the subroutine for the state processing at the time of display, and shifts the processing to Step S101 of the main loop processing.

(Step S118-14)
In step S118-14, the main CPU 301 performs processing for the RB state during ART during display, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs a process of changing the state managed by the main control board 300 to the “ART preparation state” at the end of the RB. Then, when the process of step S118-14 is completed, the subroutine of the display time state process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S101 of the main loop process.

(Processing for bonus preparation status when displayed)
Next, the display-time bonus preparation state process performed by the process of step S118-2 of FIG. 36 will be described based on FIG. Note that FIG. 37 is a diagram showing a subroutine of display bonus preparation state processing.

(Step S118-2-1)
In step S118-2-1, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the symbol combination related to BB is displayed on the active line. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not “a combination of symbols related to BB” is displayed on the active line. When it is determined that the combination of symbols related to BB is displayed on the active line (step S118-2-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S118-2-2, and the symbol related to BB is displayed. If it is determined that the combination is not displayed on the active line (step S118-2-1 = No), the process proceeds to step S118-2-3.

(Step S118-2-2)
In step S118-2-2, the main CPU 301 performs a process of changing the state managed by the main control board 300 to the “BB state”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting information relating to the “BB state” in a state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. When the process of step S118-2-2 ends, the subroutine for display bonus preparation state process ends, and the process proceeds to step S101 of the main loop process.

(Step S118-2-3)
In step S118-2-3, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the symbol combination related to the RB is displayed on the active line. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not “the combination of symbols related to RB” is displayed on the active line. And when it determines with the combination of the symbol which concerns on RB having been displayed on the effective line (step S118-2-3 = Yes), it transfers a process to step S118-2-4, If it is determined that the combination is not displayed on the active line (step S118-2-3 = No), the display-time bonus preparation state processing subroutine is terminated, and the processing is advanced to step S101 of the main loop processing. Transition.

(Step S118-2-4)
In step S118-2-4, the main CPU 301 performs a process of changing the state managed by the main control board 300 to the “RB state”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting information relating to the “RB state” in a state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. When the process of step S118-2-4 is completed, the subroutine for displaying bonus preparation state is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S101 of the main loop process.

(Process for BB state during display)
Next, the display-time BB state process performed by the process of step S118-4 of FIG. 36 will be described based on FIG. FIG. 38 is a diagram showing a subroutine for the display-time BB state process.

(Step S118-4-1)
In step S118-4-1, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not it is the BB end time. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the BB has ended based on the value of the bonus operating flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Here, in the present embodiment, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining that the BB is ended when the value of the BB operating flag in the bonus operating flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is OFF, When the value of the BB operating flag in the bonus operating flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is ON, it is determined that it is not the end of BB. If it is determined that the BB is finished (step S118-4-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S118-4-2. If it is determined that the BB is not finished ( Step S118-4-1 = No), the display time BB state processing subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S101 of the main loop processing.

(Step S118-4-2)
In step S118-4-2, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the ART winning flag is ON. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the ART winning flag is ON based on the value stored in the ART winning flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303. If it is determined that the ART winning flag is ON (step S118-4-2 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S118-4-3, and it is determined that the ART winning flag is not ON. In the case (step S118-4-2 = No), the process proceeds to step S118-4-5.

(Step S118-4-3)
In step S118-4-3, the main CPU 301 performs processing for changing the state managed by the main control board 300 to the “ART preparation state”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting information related to the “ART ready state” in a state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S118-4-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S118-4-4.

(Step S118-4-4)
In step S118-4-4, the main CPU 301 performs processing for turning off the ART winning flag. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for turning off the ART winning flag in the ART winning flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303. When the process of step S118-4-4 ends, the subroutine for the display-time BB state ends, and the process proceeds to step S101 of the main loop process.

(Step S118-4-5)
In step S118-4-5, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting the state managed by the main control board 300 to the “normal state”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting information related to the “normal state” in a state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. When the process of step S118-4-5 ends, the subroutine for the display-time BB state ends, and the process proceeds to step S101 of the main loop process.

(Process for RB state during display)
Next, the display-time RB state process performed by the process of step S118-6 of FIG. 36 will be described based on FIG. FIG. 39 is a diagram showing a subroutine of the display time RB state process.

(Step S118-6-1)
In step S <b> 118-6-1, the main CPU 301 performs a process for determining whether or not the RB has ended. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the RB has ended based on the value of the bonus operating flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Here, in the present embodiment, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining that the RB has ended when the value of the RB operating flag in the bonus operating flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is OFF, When the value of the RB operating flag in the bonus operating flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is ON, it is determined that it is not at the end of the RB. When it is determined that the RB is finished (step S118-6-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S118-6-2, and when it is judged that the RB is not finished ( Step S118-6-1 = No), the display time RB state processing subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to Step S101 of the main loop processing.

(Step S118-6-2)
In step S118-6-2, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the ART winning flag is ON. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the ART winning flag is ON based on the value stored in the ART winning flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303. If it is determined that the ART winning flag is ON (step S118-6-2 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S118-6-3, and it is determined that the ART winning flag is not ON. In the case (step S118-6-2 = No), the process proceeds to step S118-6-5.

(Step S118-6-3)
In step S118-6-3, the main CPU 301 performs a process of changing the state managed by the main control board 300 to the “ART preparation state”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting information related to the “ART ready state” in a state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S118-6-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S118-6-4.

(Step S118-6-4)
In step S118-6-4, the main CPU 301 performs processing for turning off the ART winning flag. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for turning off the ART winning flag in the ART winning flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S118-6-4 is completed, the subroutine for display RB state process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S101 of the main loop process.

(Step S118-6-5)
In step S118-6-5, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting the state managed by the main control board 300 to the “normal state”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting information related to the “normal state” in a state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. When the process of step S118-6-5 is completed, the subroutine for display RB state process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S101 of the main loop process.

(Processing for ART preparation state at the time of display)
Next, based on FIG. 40, the display-time ART preparation state process performed by the process of step S118-8 of FIG. 36 will be described. FIG. 40 is a diagram showing a subroutine for the display-time ART preparation state process.

(Step S118-8-1)
In step S118-8-1, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not “a combination of symbols related to the third RT gaming state transition replay” is displayed on the active line. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not “a combination of symbols relating to the third RT gaming state transition replay” is displayed on the active line. If it is determined that the “combination of symbols related to the third RT gaming state transition replay” is displayed on the active line (step S118-8-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S118-8-2. If it is determined that the “combination of symbols relating to the third RT gaming state transition replay” is not displayed on the active line (step S118-8-1 = No), the display-time ART ready state process is performed. The subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S101 of the main loop process.

(Step S118-8-2)
In step S118-8-2, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the ART state game number counter is “0”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the value of the ART state game number counter is “0” based on the value of the ART state game number counter provided in the main RAM 303. Do. If it is determined that the value of the ART state game number counter is “0” (step S118-8-2 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S118-8-3 to display the ART state game. If it is determined that the value of the number counter is not “0” (step S118-8-2 = No), the process proceeds to step S118-8-4.

(Step S118-8-3)
In step S118-8-3, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “50” to the value of the ART state game number counter. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “50” to the value of the ART state game number counter provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S118-8-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S118-8-4.

(Step S118-8-4)
In step S118-8-4, the main CPU 301 performs a process of changing the state managed by the main control board 300 to the “ART state”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting information related to the “ART state” in a state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. When the process of step S118-8-4 is completed, the subroutine for the display-time ART preparation state process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S101 of the main loop process.

(Processing for bonus preparation status during ART during display)
Next, the bonus preparation state process during ART during display performed by the process of step S118-10 of FIG. 36 will be described based on FIG. FIG. 41 is a diagram showing a subroutine of bonus preparation state processing during ART during display.

(Step S118-10-1)
In step S <b> 118-10-1, the main CPU 301 performs processing to determine whether or not the symbol combination related to BB is displayed on the active line. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not “a combination of symbols related to BB” is displayed on the active line. And when it determines with the combination of the symbol which concerns on BB having been displayed on the active line (step S118-10-1 = Yes), it transfers a process to step S118-10-2, If it is determined that the combination is not displayed on the active line (step S118-10-1 = No), the process proceeds to step S118-10-3.

(Step S118-10-2)
In step S <b> 118-10-2, the main CPU 301 performs processing for changing the state managed by the main control board 300 to the “ART state BB state”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting information related to the “BB state during ART” in a state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S118-10-2 is completed, the subroutine for the bonus preparation state process during display ART is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S101 of the main loop process.

(Step S118-10-3)
In step S <b> 118-10-3, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the symbol combination related to the RB is displayed on the active line. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not “the combination of symbols related to RB” is displayed on the active line. And when it determines with the combination of the symbol which concerns on RB having been displayed on the effective line (step S118-10-3 = Yes), it transfers a process to step S118-10-4, and the symbol which concerns on RB If it is determined that the combination is not displayed on the active line (step S118-10-3 = No), the bonus preparation state processing subroutine during display ART is terminated, and the main loop processing proceeds to step S101. Migrate processing.

(Step S118-10-4)
In step S <b> 118-10-4, the main CPU 301 performs processing for changing the state managed by the main control board 300 to the “RB state during ART”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting information related to the “RB status during ART” in a status storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S118-10-4 is completed, the subroutine for the bonus preparation state process during display ART is ended, and the process proceeds to step S101 of the main loop process.

(Process for BB state during ART during display)
Next, the processing for the BB state during ART during display performed by the processing of step S118-12 of FIG. 36 will be described based on FIG. FIG. 42 is a diagram showing a subroutine of processing for the BB state during ART during display.

(Step S118-12-1)
In step S118-12-1, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not it is the BB end time. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the BB has ended based on the value of the bonus operating flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Here, in the present embodiment, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining that the BB is ended when the value of the BB operating flag in the bonus operating flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is OFF, When the value of the BB operating flag in the bonus operating flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is ON, it is determined that it is not the end of BB. If it is determined that the BB is finished (step S118-12-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S118-12-2. If it is determined that the BB is not finished ( Step S118-12-1 = No), the subroutine for the BB state process during ART during display is terminated, and the process proceeds to Step S101 of the main loop process.

(Step S118-12-2)
In step S118-12-2, the main CPU 301 performs a process of changing the state managed by the main control board 300 to the “ART preparation state”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting information related to the “ART ready state” in a state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. When the process of step S118-12-2 is completed, the subroutine for the BB state process during ART during display is ended, and the process proceeds to step S101 of the main loop process.

(Process for RB state during ART during display)
Next, the processing for the RB state during ART during display performed by the processing of step S118-14 of FIG. 36 will be described based on FIG. FIG. 43 is a diagram showing a subroutine of RB state processing during ART during display.

(Step S118-14-1)
In step S118-14-1, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not it is the RB end time. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the RB has ended based on the value of the bonus operating flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Here, in the present embodiment, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining that the RB has ended when the value of the RB operating flag in the bonus operating flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is OFF, When the value of the RB operating flag in the bonus operating flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is ON, it is determined that it is not at the end of the RB. If it is determined that the RB is finished (step S118-14-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S118-14-2. If it is determined that the RB is not finished ( Step S118-14-1 = No), the subroutine for the RB state process during ART during display is terminated, and the process proceeds to Step S101 of the main loop process.

(Step S118-14-2)
In step S118-14-2, the main CPU 301 performs a process of changing the state managed by the main control board 300 to the “ART preparation state”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting information related to the “ART ready state” in a state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. When the process of step S118-14-2 is completed, the subroutine for the RB state process during ART during display is ended, and the process proceeds to step S101 of the main loop process.

(Interrupt processing)
Next, interrupt processing will be described with reference to FIG. Here, the interrupt process is a process performed by interrupting the main loop process every “1.49 ms”.

(Step S201)
In step S <b> 201, the main CPU 301 performs processing for saving a register. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for saving the value of the register used at the time of step S201. Then, when the process of step S201 ends, the process proceeds to step S202.

(Step S202)
In step S202, the main CPU 301 performs input port read processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for receiving various signals from the status board 100, the reel control board 150, and the power supply board 200. Then, when the process of step S202 ends, the process proceeds to step S203.

(Step S203)
In step S203, the main CPU 301 performs timer measurement processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the timer counter for measuring the minimum game time and the like. Then, when the process of step S203 ends, the process proceeds to step S204.

(Step S204)
In step S204, the main CPU 301 performs a reel drive control process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 sets “3” corresponding to the right reel 20 as the initial value of the reel number, and drives the right stepping motor 153 corresponding to the reel number “3”, thereby Rotation acceleration, constant speed, deceleration control, etc. are performed. Next, the main CPU 301 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the reel number, and drives the intermediate stepping motor 152 corresponding to the reel number “2”, thereby controlling the acceleration, constant speed, and deceleration of the rotation of the intermediate reel 19. Etc. Next, the main CPU 301 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the reel number and drives the left stepping motor 151 corresponding to the reel number “1”, thereby controlling the acceleration, constant speed, and deceleration of the rotation of the left reel 18. Etc. Then, when the process of step S204 ends, the process proceeds to step S205.

(Step S205)
In step S205, the main CPU 301 performs external signal output processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting output port data of the external concentration terminal board 30 and the like. Then, when the process of step S205 ends, the process proceeds to step S206.

(Step S206)
In step S206, the main CPU 301 performs an LED display process, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs a process of creating display data of the stored number display 15, the payout number display 16, the first BET lamp 26, the second BET lamp 27, and the third BET lamp 28. Then, when the process of step S206 ends, the process proceeds to step S207.

(Step S207)
In step S207, the main CPU 301 performs control command transmission processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for transmitting a command set in an effect transmission data storage area provided in the main RAM 303 to the sub-control board 400. Then, when the process of step S207 ends, the process proceeds to step S208.

(Step S208)
In step S208, the main CPU 301 performs port output processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing of transmitting various signals to the status board 100, the reel control board 150, the power supply board 200, and the sub control board 400. Then, when the process of step S208 ends, the process proceeds to step S209.

(Step S209)
In step S209, the main CPU 301 performs a register restoration process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of restoring the saved register value in the process of step S201. Then, when the process of step S209 ends, the interrupt process ends, and the process returns to the main loop process.

(LED display processing)
Next, based on FIG. 45, the LED display process performed by the process of step S206 of FIG. 44 is demonstrated. FIG. 45 is a diagram showing a subroutine of LED display processing.

(Step S206-1)
In step S <b> 206-1, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether it is time to create BET lamp data. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether it is time to create BET lamp data for turning on or off the first BET lamp 26, the second BET lamp 27, and the third BET lamp 28. Here, in the present embodiment, the main CPU 301 detects that the selector sensor 14s detects that a medal has been inserted into the medal slot 6, or if the BET switch 7sw detects an operation of the BET button 7, the MAXBET switch 8sw. Detects an operation of the MAXBET button 8, and when the “combination of symbols relating to replay” is displayed on the active line, the LEDs of the first BET lamp 26, the second BET lamp 27, and the third BET lamp 28 are turned on or off. To determine that it is time to create BET lamp data for the purpose. If it is determined that the BET ramp data is being created (step S206-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S206-2. If it is determined that the BET ramp data is not being created ( Step S206-1 = No), the process proceeds to step S206-3.

(Step S206-2)
In step S206-2, the main CPU 301 performs a BET lamp LED data creation process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for creating BET lamp data for turning on or off the first BET lamp 26, the second BET lamp 27, and the third BET lamp 28. Then, when the process of step S206-2 ends, the LED display process subroutine ends, and the process proceeds to interrupt process step S207.

(Step S206-3)
In step S <b> 206-3, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not it is time to create the stored number indicator data. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not it is time to create stored number display data for turning on or off the stored number display 15. Here, in the present embodiment, the main CPU 301 detects that the selector sensor 14 s has inserted a medal into the medal slot 6 and adds the value of the stored number counter provided in the main RAM 303. When the winning symbol combination "is displayed on the active line and the value of the stored number counter provided in the main RAM 303 is added, the BET switch 7sw detects the operation of the BET button 7 and is provided in the main RAM 303. When the stored number counter value is subtracted, when the MAXBET switch 8sw detects the operation of the MAXBET button 8 and subtracts the stored number counter value provided in the main RAM 303, the stored number indicator data is generated. The process which determines that it is is performed. If it is determined that the stored number indicator data is being created (step S206-3 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S206-4, and it is determined that the stored number indicator data is not being created. In this case (step S206-3 = No), the process proceeds to step S206-5.

(Step S206-4)
In step S206-4, the main CPU 301 performs LED data creation processing for the stored number indicator. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for creating stored number display data for turning on or off the LED of the stored number display 15. When the process of step S206-4 ends, the LED display process subroutine ends, and the process proceeds to interrupt process step S207.

(Step S206-5)
In step S <b> 206-5, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not it is time to create payout number display data. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not it is time to create payout number display data for turning on or off the payout number display 16. Here, in the present embodiment, the main CPU 301 notifies the operation sequence of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 when “a combination of symbols related to winning” is displayed on the active line. When it is time to perform, processing for determining that it is time to create the payout number display data. When it is determined that the payout number display data is being created (step S206-5 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S206-6, and it is determined that the payout number display data is not being generated. In that case (step S206-5 = No), the process proceeds to step S206-8.

(Step S206-6)
In step S206-6, the main CPU 301 performs instruction information display LED data creation processing, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs a process of creating payout number display data for turning on / off the LED of the payout number display 16. Then, when the process of step S206-6 ends, the process proceeds to step S206-7.

(Step S206-7)
In step S206-7, the main CPU 301 performs a payout number display LED data creation process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 creates payout number display LED data for displaying the payout number on the payout number display 16 when the “combination of symbols related to winning” is displayed on the active line. Process. When the process of step S206-7 ends, the LED display process subroutine ends, and the process proceeds to interrupt process step S207.

(Step S206-8)
In step S206-8, the main CPU 301 performs various LED data creation processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 creates replay display LED data for lighting a replay display lamp (not shown) that is turned on when the “replay symbol combination” is displayed on the active line. Processing and start lamp LED data creation processing for lighting a start lamp (not shown) that is turned on when the operation of the start lever 10 is effective are performed. When the process of step S206-8 ends, the LED display process subroutine ends, and the process proceeds to step S207 of the interrupt process.

(Instruction information display LED data creation process)
Next, the instruction information display LED data creation process performed by the process of step S206-6 of FIG. 45 will be described based on FIG. FIG. 46 is a diagram showing a subroutine of instruction information display LED data creation processing.

(Step S206-6-1)
In step S <b> 206-6-1, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the “normal state” is set. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “normal state” based on the value stored in the state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Processing to determine is performed. If it is determined that the state is the “normal state” (step S206-6-1 = Yes), the instruction information display LED data creation process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S206-7 of the LED display process. To migrate. On the other hand, if it is determined that the state is not the “normal state” (step S206-6-1 = No), the process proceeds to step S206-6-2.

(Step S206-6-2)
In step S <b> 206-6-2, the main CPU 301 performs processing to determine whether or not the winning combination is “push order bell”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the winning combination is “push order bell” based on the value stored in the winning combination storing area provided in the main RAM 303. If it is determined that the winning combination is “push order bell” (step S206-6-2 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S206-6-3, and the winning combination is “push order bell”. If it is determined that this is not the case (step S206-6-2 = No), the process proceeds to step S206-6-4.

(Step S206-6-3)
In step S <b> 206-6-3, the main CPU 301 performs a push order bell-time LED data creation process. Specifically, when the “push order bell” is determined as the winning combination, the main CPU 301 uses the push order bell to notify the operation order of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13. A process for creating the LED data for use is performed. When the process of step S206-6-3 is completed, the subroutine of the instruction information display LED data creation process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S206-7 of the LED display process.

(Step S206-6-4)
In step S <b> 206-6-4, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the “fourth RT gaming state”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not it is the “fourth RT gaming state” based on a value stored in a gaming state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. If it is determined that the state is the “fourth RT gaming state” (step S206-6-4 = Yes), the instruction information display LED data creation process subroutine is terminated, and the LED display process step S206-7 is completed. The process is transferred to. On the other hand, when it is determined that the state is not the “fourth RT gaming state” (step S206-6-4 = No), the process proceeds to step S206-6-5.

  As described above, when the player is in the “fourth RT gaming state”, that is, when the “bonus” is won, information on the winning combination is not displayed on the payout number display 16. Thereby, the control burden of the main control board 300 can be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the “fourth RT gaming state” is based on the value stored in the gaming state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Thus, it is determined whether or not “bonus” is won, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be determined whether or not “bonus” is won based on the value stored in the winning combination storage area provided in the main RAM 303, or the carry provided in the main RAM 303 may be determined. Based on the value of the flag storage area, it may be determined whether or not “bonus” is won. Further, based on the value stored in the state storage area provided in the main RAM 303, a process for determining whether the state is the “bonus preparation state” or the “ART bonus preparation state” is performed. Thus, it may be determined whether or not “bonus” is won.

(Step S206-6-5)
In step S206-6-5, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the winning combination is “push order replay”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the winning combination is “push order replay” based on the value stored in the winning combination storage area provided in the main RAM 303. If it is determined that the winning combination is “push order replay” (step S206-6-5 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S206-6-6, and the winning combination is “push order replay”. If it is determined that this is not the case (step S206-6-5 = No), the instruction information display LED data creation process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S206-7 in the LED display process.

(Step S206-6-6)
In step S206-6-6, the main CPU 301 performs a push order replay LED data creation process. Specifically, when the “push order replay” is determined as the winning combination, the main CPU 301 performs a push order replay for notifying the operation order of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13. A process for creating the LED data for use is performed. When the process of step S206-6-6 ends, the instruction information display LED data creation process subroutine ends, and the process proceeds to step S206-7 of the LED display process.

  Here, in the instruction information display LED data creation process, the main CPU 301 performs the internal lottery process when the state managed by the main control board 300 is other than the “normal state” (step S206-6-1 = No). Thus, a process of determining whether or not “push order bell” has been determined as the winning combination is performed (step S206-6-2). When “push order bell” is determined as the winning combination (step S206-6-2 = Yes), push order bell time LED data creation processing is performed (step S206-6-3). Then, in the port output process (step S208), the main CPU 301 transmits the push order bell time LED data created in the push order bell time LED data creation process (step S206-6-3) to the status board 100. Perform the process.

  The status board 100 controls the payout number display 16 on the basis of the push order bell time LED data received from the main control board 300. As a result, the operation order of the left stop button 11, middle stop button 12, and right stop button 13 is displayed on the payout number display 16.

  Further, in the instruction information display LED data creation processing, the main CPU 301 performs internal lottery processing when the state managed by the main control board 300 is other than the “normal state” (step S206-6-1 = No). Then, a process of determining whether or not “push order bell” is determined as the winning combination is performed (step S206-6-2). If it is determined that the “push order bell” is not determined as the winning combination (step S206-6-2 = No), it is determined whether or not it is the “fourth RT gaming state”. (Step S206-6-4). If it is determined that it is not the “fourth RT gaming state” (step S206-6-4 = No), it is determined whether or not “push order replay” is determined as the winning combination by the internal lottery process. Processing is performed (step S206-6-5). When it is determined that “push order replay” has been determined as the winning combination (step S206-6-5 = Yes), push order replay LED data creation processing is performed (step S206-6-6). Then, in the port output process (step S208), the main CPU 301 transmits the push order replay LED data created in the push order replay LED data creation process (step S206-6-6) to the status board 100. Perform the process.

  Then, the status board 100 controls the payout number display device 16 based on the push order replay LED data received from the main control board 300. As a result, the operation order of the left stop button 11, middle stop button 12, and right stop button 13 is displayed on the payout number display 16.

  On the other hand, when the “common bell” is determined as the winning combination in the internal lottery process, the main CPU 301 has not determined “push order bell” as the winning combination by the internal lottery process (step S206-6). -2 = No), since “push order replay” is not determined as the winning combination (step S206-6-5 = No), the instruction information display LED data creation process is terminated. Accordingly, the information relating to the winning combination is not displayed on the payout number display 16.

  In this way, the symbols displayed on the active line according to the operation order of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13, such as “push order bell” and “push order replay”. When a winning combination with a different combination is determined, information on the winning combination, for example, an operation order of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 is notified by the payout number display unit 16. It becomes. On the other hand, when a winning combination other than the winning combination having a different combination of symbols displayed on the active line is determined according to the operation order of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13, The payout number display 16 does not notify the information related to the winning combination. Thereby, the control burden of the main control board 300 can be reduced.

  In addition, regardless of the order in which the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 are operated, “the combination of symbols relating to the fourth bell” is displayed on the active line. When the “common bell” is determined as the winning combination, information relating to the winning combination is not displayed on the payout number display 16. Thereby, the control burden of the main control board 300 can be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the winning combination is “push order bell”, and by determining whether or not the winning combination is “push order replay”, the “common bell” is determined. Although it is determined whether or not the winning combination is determined, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a process of determining whether or not “common bell” is determined as a winning combination may be performed.

  In the internal lottery process, if “normal replay” is determined as the winning combination, the main CPU 301 has not determined “push order bell” as the winning combination by the internal lottery process (step S206-6). 2 = No), and “push order replay” is not determined as the winning combination (step S206-6-5 = No), the LED data creation process for displaying instruction information is ended. Accordingly, the information relating to the winning combination is not displayed on the payout number display 16.

  Thus, regardless of the order in which the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 are operated, the “combination of symbols related to general replay” is displayed on the active line, and RT When “normal replay” that does not involve the transition of the gaming state is determined as the winning combination, information relating to the winning combination is not displayed on the payout number display 16. Thereby, the control burden of the main control board 300 can be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the winning combination is “push order bell” and whether or not the winning combination is “push order replay”, thereby determining “normal replay”. Although it is determined whether or not the winning combination is determined, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a process for determining whether or not “normal replay” is determined as the winning combination may be performed.

  In the internal lottery process, when “watermelon”, “cherry”, or “special role” is determined as the winning combination, the main CPU 301 determines “push order bell” as the winning combination by the internal lottery process. Since it is not performed (step S206-6-2 = No) and “push order replay” is not determined as the winning combination (step S206-6-5 = No), the instruction information display LED data creation process is terminated. It will be. Accordingly, the information relating to the winning combination is not displayed on the payout number display 16.

  As described above, when the stop operation of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 is performed at a timing at which "the combination of symbols related to watermelon" can be displayed on the effective line, When “watermelon” capable of displaying “combination of symbols” is determined as a winning combination, information on the winning combination is not displayed on the payout number display 16. Thereby, the control burden of the main control board 300 can be reduced.

  In addition, when the stop operation of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 is performed at a timing at which “the combination of symbols related to cherry” can be displayed on the active line, When “cherry” capable of displaying “combination” is determined as the winning combination, information relating to the winning combination is not displayed on the payout number display 16. Thereby, the control burden of the main control board 300 can be reduced.

  In addition, when the stop operation of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 is performed at a timing at which “the combination of symbols related to the chance” can be displayed on the effective line, When the “special combination” that can display the “combination of symbols” is determined as the winning combination, the information relating to the winning combination is not displayed on the payout number display 16. Thereby, the control burden of the main control board 300 can be reduced.

  In other words, "Watermelon" that can display "Combination of symbols related to watermelon", "Cherry" that can display "Combination of symbols related to Cherry", and "Special" that can display "Combination of symbols related to Chance" “Combination of symbols related to winning” is displayed by operating the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 at a fixed timing as in the case where the “comb” is determined as the winning combination. When a possible winning combination is determined, information on the winning combination is not displayed on the payout number display 16. Thereby, the control burden of the main control board 300 can be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the winning combination is “push order bell” and whether or not the winning combination is “push order replay”, thereby determining “watermelon”, “ Although it is determined whether or not “cherry” or “special role” is determined as the winning combination, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a process of determining whether “watermelon”, “cherry”, or “special combination” is determined as the winning combination may be performed.

  Also, when “Cherry” that can display “Character combination related to cherry” is determined as a winning combination, or “Watermelon” that can display “Combination of patterns related to watermelon” is determined as a winning combination , If the “special role” that can display “the combination of symbols related to chance” is determined as the winning role, “the combination of symbols related to cherry”, “the combination of symbols related to watermelon”, “ Will be displayed on the active line. Then, if it is displayed on the active line, such as “Combination of symbols related to cherry”, “Combination of symbols related to watermelon”, or “Combination of symbols related to chance”, a medal that does not exceed the number of inserted coins will be paid. When the winning combination that can display the “combination of symbols related to winning” is determined, information on the winning combination is not displayed on the payout number display 16. Thereby, the control burden of the main control board 300 can be reduced.

  In the internal lottery process, when “bonus” is determined as the winning combination, the main CPU 301 does not determine “push order bell” as the winning combination by the internal lottery process (step S206-6-2 = No) Since “push order replay” is not determined as the winning combination (step S206-6-5 = No), the instruction information display LED data creation process is terminated. Accordingly, the information relating to the winning combination is not displayed on the payout number display 16.

  When “bonus” and “push order bell” are determined as the winning combination, the main CPU 301 determines “push order bell” as the winning combination by the internal lottery process (step S206-6-6). 2 = Yes), the LED data creation process for the push order bell time (step S206-6-3) will be performed. Thereby, even when a game in which “a combination of symbols related to a bonus” cannot be displayed on the active line due to a lack of skill of the player continues, consumption of medals can be suppressed.

  In addition, when “bonus” and “cherry” are determined as winning roles, “bonus” and “watermelon” are determined, or “bonus” and “special role” are determined, The main CPU 301 is in the “fourth RT gaming state” because the “push order bell” is not determined as the winning combination (step S206-6- 2 = No) by the internal lottery process (step S206-6-4 = Yes), the instruction information display LED data creation process is terminated. Accordingly, the information relating to the winning combination is not displayed on the payout number display 16.

(Main processing on sub-control board)
Next, the main process in the sub control board will be described with reference to FIG.

(Step S301)
In step S301, the sub CPU 401 performs an initialization process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for checking an error in the sub RAM 403 and the like. Then, when the process of step S301 ends, the process proceeds to step S302.

(Step S302)
In step S302, the sub CPU 401 performs main control board communication processing, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In the processing, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for analyzing a command received from the main control board 300 and the like. Then, when the process of step S302 ends, the process proceeds to step S303.

(Step S303)
In step S303, the sub CPU 401 performs sound control processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of outputting sound from the speaker 33 based on the sound data determined by the sound data determination process in step S302-3-3 described later. For example, when the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “ART state”, any one of “common bell”, “watermelon”, and “cherry” is determined and determined by the main control board 300 as the winning combination. When the sub control board 400 receives the conditional device command related to the winning combination and the instruction effect command determined based on the conditional device command, the payout number display 16 managed by the main control board 300 displays “ The instruction information corresponding to “common bell”, “watermelon”, and “cherry” is not displayed, but the presentation using the speaker 33 controlled by the sub control board 400 via the presentation control board 500 is performed. Then, when the process of step S303 ends, the process proceeds to step S304.

(Step S304)
In step S304, the sub CPU 401 performs LED control processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 controls the LED 32 based on the LED data determined by the LED data determination process in step S302-3-2 described later. For example, when the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “ART state”, any one of “common bell”, “watermelon”, and “cherry” is determined as the winning combination, and the determined winning combination When the sub control board 400 receives the conditional device command and the instruction effect command determined based on the conditional device command, the payout number display 16 managed by the main control board 300 displays “common bell”, “watermelon” The instruction information corresponding to “Cherry” is not displayed, but the effect using the LED 32 controlled by the sub control board 400 via the effect control board 500 is performed. Then, when the process of step S304 ends, the process proceeds to step S305.

(Step S305)
In step S305, the sub CPU 401 performs image control processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 controls the liquid crystal display device 31 based on the image data determined by the image data determination process in step S302-3-4 described later. For example, when the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “ART state”, any one of “common bell”, “watermelon”, and “cherry” is determined as the winning combination, and the determined winning combination When the sub control board 400 receives the conditional device command and the instruction effect command determined based on the conditional device command, the payout number display 16 managed by the main control board 300 displays “common bell”, “watermelon” The instruction information corresponding to “Cherry” is not displayed, but an effect using the liquid crystal display device 31 controlled by the sub-control board 400 via the effect control board 500 is performed. Then, when the process of step S305 ends, the process proceeds to step S306.

(Step S306)
In step S306, the sub CPU 401 performs various switch detection processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of executing a predetermined process when the effect button sensor 21s detects an operation of the effect button 21 or when the cross key sensor 22s detects an operation of the cross key 22. Then, when the process of step S306 ends, the process proceeds to step S302.

(Main control board communication processing)
Next, the main control board communication process performed by the process of step S302 of FIG. 47 will be described based on FIG. FIG. 48 is a diagram showing a subroutine of main control board communication processing.

(Step S302-1)
In step S302-1, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not a different command is received. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not the command received from the main control board 300 is a command different from the command received last time. If it is determined that a different command has been received (step S302-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-2. If it is determined that a different command has not been received (step S302). -1 = No), the main control board communication process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S303 of the main process in the sub control board.

(Step S302-2)
In step S302-2, the sub CPU 401 performs a game information storage process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for creating game information based on a command different from the previously transmitted command and storing it in a predetermined storage area of the sub RAM 403. For example, when a conditional device command is received, game information based on the conditional device command is created. When an instruction information command is received, game information is created based on the instruction information command, and an instruction effect command is received. The game information based on the instruction effect command is created. Then, when the process of step S302-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3.

(Step S302-3)
In step S302-3, the sub CPU 401 performs a command analysis process that will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the sub CPU 401 executes a process based on the game information stored by the process of step S302-2. When the process of step S302-3 ends, the main control board communication process subroutine ends, and the process proceeds to step S303 of the main process in the sub control board.

(Command analysis processing)
Next, based on FIG. 49, the command analysis process performed by the process of step S302-3 of FIG. 48 is demonstrated. FIG. 49 is a diagram showing a subroutine of command analysis processing.

(Step S302-3-1)
In step S302-3-1, the sub CPU 401 performs a sub effect determination process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 specifies the state managed by the main control board 300 based on the command received by the main control board 300, and uses the effect determination table (see FIG. 19) provided in the sub ROM 402. Perform processing to select. Then, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining an effect executed by the liquid crystal display device 31 or the like based on the selected effect determination table. When an instruction effect command is received from the main control board 300, an effect based on the instruction effect command is executed. When an instruction effect command is received from the main control board 300, an effect based on the instruction effect command may be executed after a further subdivided effect is determined in the processing. For example, when the “instruction effect command” indicating “effect M” (“cut-in effect” as an example) is received, the sub CPU 401 selects “weak cut-in effect” or “strong cut-in effect”. The determined “weak cut-in effect” or “strong cut-in effect” may be executed. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-2.

(Step S302-3-2)
In step S302-3-2, the sub CPU 401 performs LED data determination processing. Specifically, sub CPU401 performs the process which determines the LED data corresponding to the production | presentation determined by the sub production | presentation determination process of step S302-3-1. Then, when the process of step S302-3-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-3.

(Step S302-3-3)
In step S302-3-3, the sub CPU 401 performs sound data determination processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining sound data corresponding to the effect determined by the sub effect determining process in step S302-3-1. Then, when the process of step S302-3-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-4.

(Step S302-3-4)
In step S302-3-4, the sub CPU 401 performs image data determination processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining image data corresponding to the effect determined by the sub effect determining process in step S302-3-1. When the process of step S302-3-4 ends, the command analysis process subroutine ends, and the process proceeds to step S303 of the main process in the sub control board.

(Instruction information command transmission start timing and instruction information display start timing)
Next, the transmission start timing of the instruction information command and the display start timing of the instruction information in this embodiment will be described.

  As described above, in a game in which an “instruction information command” is transmitted from the main control board 300 to the sub control board 400, the instruction information is displayed on the payout number display 16 managed by the main control board 300. The sub-control board 400 displays the instruction information using the liquid crystal display device 31 and the like via the effect control board 500. Therefore, in the following description, the transmission start timing of the instruction information command, the display start timing of the instruction information displayed on the payout number display device 16, and the display start timing of the instruction information displayed on the liquid crystal display device 31 will be described. I do.

  First, the flow of one game performed in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be briefly described. (A) When the player operates “start lever”, (b) “reel starts rotating” ( The left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 start rotating), and after a predetermined time has elapsed since the "reel starts rotating", (c) "acceptance of stop button" (left stop button 11, middle stop) Button 12 and right stop button 13 are permitted), and (d) all stop buttons of left stop button 11, middle stop button 12, and right stop button 13 are operated after "acceptance of stop button is permitted". When it is done, it becomes “at the time of the third stop” when all the reels are stopped. (E) After “at the time of the third stop”, when a combination of symbols related to winning is displayed, the medal is paid out. “At the time of withdrawal” There Upon completion, one game is finished.

(Instruction information command transmission start timing)
The transmission start timing of the instruction information command is from (a) “operating the start lever” to (c) “allowing to accept the stop button” described in the flow of one game described above. The instruction information command is transmitted from the main control board 300 to the sub control board 400, for example, at the set timing.

  It should be noted that a change or the like occurs in the instruction information command transmitted at the timing from (a) “start lever is operated” to (c) “acceptance of stop button acceptance”, and new instruction information When it is necessary to send a command, a new one after the change is made at a timing between (c) “acceptance of accepting the stop button” and (d) “third stop” operation being performed. An instruction information command is transmitted. For example, in the first stop, when the player has mistakenly performed an operation in an order different from the notified operation order, the content displayed on the payout number display 16 is switched. The instruction information command corresponding to the display content to be switched is newly transmitted to the sub-control board 400 at the timing from when the second stop is performed until the second stop is performed.

(Display start timing of instruction information displayed on the payout number display 16)
The display start timing of the instruction information displayed on the payout number display 16 is (a) after the “start lever is operated” described in the flow of one game described above, and (c) “accepting the stop button” The instruction information is displayed on the payout number display 16 at the set display start timing at an arbitrary timing until the “payment is permitted”. Note that the timing at which the instruction information is displayed on the payout number display 16 may be synchronized with the timing at which the instruction information is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 31 described later, or may be asynchronous.

  The instruction information is displayed on the payout number display 16 at an arbitrary timing from (a) “start lever is operated” to (c) “acceptance of stop button”. Will be performed continuously from the start to (d) “during third stop”.

(Display start timing of instruction information displayed on the liquid crystal display device 31)
The display start timing of the instruction information displayed on the liquid crystal display device 31 is the same as that described in the flow of one game described above. It is set at an arbitrary timing until “permitted”, and the instruction information is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 31 at the set display start timing. However, since the display of the instruction information by the liquid crystal display device 31 can be started after the sub control board 400 receives the instruction information command transmitted from the main control board 300, the timing after the instruction information command is transmitted. Will be set. It should be noted that the timing for starting the display of the instruction information in the liquid crystal display device 31 may be synchronized with the timing for starting the display of the instruction information in the payout number display 16 or may be asynchronous. In addition to the liquid crystal display device 31, the instruction information may be notified using the LED 32 and the speaker 33.

  The display of the instruction information on the liquid crystal display device 31 is started at a timing from (a) “start lever is operated” to (c) “acceptance of stop button”. And (d) until “during third stop” is performed.

(First specific example of timing chart showing transmission start timing of instruction information command and display start timing of payout number display device and liquid crystal display device)
Next, a first specific example of a timing chart showing the transmission start timing of the instruction information command and the display start timing of the payout number display device and the liquid crystal display device will be described based on FIG. 50 exemplifies the above-described instruction information command transmission start timing, instruction information display start timing displayed on the payout number display 16, and instruction information display start timing displayed on the liquid crystal display device 31. Is. Further, timing (a) shown in the timing charts of the first to fourth specific examples described below corresponds to the above-described (a) “start lever operated”, and the timing ( b) corresponds to the above-described (b) “reel starts rotating”, and timing (c) corresponds to the above-described (c) “permission of accepting the stop button”, and timing (d) Corresponds to (d) “during third stop”, and timing (e) corresponds to (e) “during payout”.

  First, when the start lever 10 is operated at timing (a), an instruction information command is transmitted from the main control board 300 to the sub control board 400.

  Next, when the transmission of the instruction information command is completed at the timing (a-1) (at the falling edge from transmission to non-transmission), the display of the instruction information by the payout number display 16 and the instruction information by the liquid crystal display device 31 are performed. Display is started. That is, in the first specific example of FIG. 50, the display start of the instruction information by the payout number display device 16 and the display start of the instruction information by the liquid crystal display device 31 are the same timing (synchronized).

  Next, at the timing (b), the reels of the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 start to rotate. At the timing (b), the display of the instruction information by the payout number display 16 and the display of the instruction information by the liquid crystal display device 31 are continuously performed.

  Next, at timing (c), reception of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 is permitted. At the timing (c), the display of the instruction information by the payout number display device 16 and the display of the instruction information by the liquid crystal display device 31 are continuously performed.

  Next, at timing (d), when all the stop buttons of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 are operated, the instruction information is displayed on the payout number display 16 and the liquid crystal display device is displayed. The display of the instruction information by 31 is not displayed. That is, in the first specific example of FIG. 50, the display end of the instruction information by the payout number display 16 and the display end of the instruction information by the liquid crystal display device 31 are at the same timing (synchronized).

  Next, at timing (e), when all stop buttons of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 have been operated, "combination of symbols related to winning" is displayed. The medal will be paid out. At the time of paying out medals, the payout number display 16 displays the payout number of medals corresponding to the “combination of symbols related to winning”, and the “combination of symbols related to winning” is displayed on the liquid crystal display 31. An image indicating that it has been displayed (an image indicating the number of medals paid out or an image indicating that a medal has been acquired) will be displayed. At timing (d), the display of the instruction information on the payout number display 16 is ended, so that it is clearly distinguished from the display of the payout number of medals displayed on the payout number display 16 at the timing (e). be able to.

(Second specific example of timing chart showing transmission start timing of instruction information command and display start timing of payout number display device and liquid crystal display device)
Next, a second specific example of a timing chart showing the transmission start timing of the instruction information command and the display start timing of the payout number display device and the liquid crystal display device will be described with reference to FIG. 51, the above-described instruction information command transmission start timing, instruction information display start timing displayed on the payout number display unit 16, and instruction information display start timing displayed on the liquid crystal display device 31 are embodied. Is.

  First, when the start lever 10 is operated at timing (a), an instruction information command is transmitted from the main control board 300 to the sub control board 400.

  Next, at the timing (b), the reels of the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 start to rotate. At the timing when the reel starts to rotate, the display of the instruction information by the payout number display 16 is started. At timing (b), since the display of the instruction information by the liquid crystal display device 31 has not started, in the second specific example of FIG. 51, the display of the instruction information by the payout number display 16 and the liquid crystal The display device 31 starts displaying instruction information at a different timing (asynchronous).

  Next, at timing (b-1), display of instruction information by the liquid crystal display device 31 is started. That is, the display of the instruction information by the liquid crystal display device 31 is started at a timing from “reel rotation start” at timing (b) until “stop button reception permission” is performed at timing (c). It becomes. At the timing (b-1), the display of the instruction information by the payout number display 16 is continuously performed.

  Next, at timing (c), reception of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 is permitted. At the timing (c), the display of the instruction information by the payout number display device 16 and the display of the instruction information by the liquid crystal display device 31 are continuously performed.

  Next, at timing (d), when all the stop buttons of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 are operated, the instruction information is displayed on the payout number display 16 and the liquid crystal display device is displayed. The display of the instruction information by 31 is not displayed. That is, in the second specific example of FIG. 51, the display end of the instruction information by the payout number display device 16 and the display end of the instruction information by the liquid crystal display device 31 are the same timing (synchronized).

  Next, at timing (e), when all stop buttons of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 have been operated, "combination of symbols related to winning" is displayed. The medal will be paid out. At the time of paying out medals, the payout number display 16 displays the payout number of medals corresponding to the “combination of symbols related to winning”, and the “combination of symbols related to winning” is displayed on the liquid crystal display 31. An image indicating that it has been displayed (an image indicating the number of medals paid out or an image indicating that a medal has been acquired) will be displayed. At timing (d), the display of the instruction information on the payout number display 16 is ended, so that it is clearly distinguished from the display of the payout number of medals displayed on the payout number display 16 at the timing (e). be able to.

(Third specific example of timing chart showing transmission start timing of instruction information command and display start timing of payout number display device and liquid crystal display device)
Next, a third specific example of a timing chart showing the transmission start timing of the instruction information command and the display start timing of the payout number display device and the liquid crystal display device will be described based on FIG. 52, the above-described instruction information command transmission start timing, instruction information display start timing displayed on the payout number display 16, and instruction information display start timing displayed on the liquid crystal display device 31 are embodied. Is.

  First, when the start lever 10 is operated at timing (a), an instruction information command is transmitted from the main control board 300 to the sub control board 400.

  Next, at the timing (b), the reels of the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 start to rotate. At the timing (b), the display of the instruction information by the liquid crystal display device 31 is started and the display of the instruction information by the payout number display unit 16 is not started. Therefore, in the third specific example of FIG. The display start of the instruction information by the payout number display device 16 and the display start of the instruction information by the liquid crystal display device 31 are at different timings (asynchronous).

  Next, at timing (c), reception of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 is permitted. In addition, at the timing when acceptance of each stop button is permitted, the display of the instruction information by the payout number display 16 is started. At the timing (c), the display of the instruction information by the liquid crystal display device 31 is continuously performed.

  Next, at timing (d), when all the stop buttons of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 are operated, the instruction information is displayed on the payout number display 16 and the liquid crystal display device is displayed. The display of the instruction information by 31 is not displayed. That is, in the third specific example of FIG. 52, the display end of the instruction information by the payout number display device 16 and the display end of the instruction information by the liquid crystal display device 31 are the same timing (synchronized).

  Next, at timing (e), when all stop buttons of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 have been operated, "combination of symbols related to winning" is displayed. The medal will be paid out. At the time of paying out medals, the payout number display 16 displays the payout number of medals corresponding to the “combination of symbols related to winning”, and the “combination of symbols related to winning” is displayed on the liquid crystal display 31. An image indicating that it has been displayed (an image indicating the number of medals paid out or an image indicating that a medal has been acquired) will be displayed. At timing (d), the display of the instruction information on the payout number display 16 is ended, so that it is clearly distinguished from the display of the payout number of medals displayed on the payout number display 16 at the timing (e). be able to.

(Fourth specific example of timing chart showing transmission start timing of instruction information command and display start timing of payout number display device and liquid crystal display device)
Next, a fourth specific example of a timing chart showing the transmission start timing of the instruction information command and the display start timing of the payout number display device and the liquid crystal display device will be described with reference to FIG. 53, the above-described instruction information command transmission start timing, instruction information display start timing displayed on the payout number display unit 16, and instruction information display start timing displayed on the liquid crystal display device 31 are embodied. Is.

  First, when the start lever 10 is operated at the timing (a), the display of the instruction information by the payout number display 16 is started. At timing (a), the instruction information command is not transmitted, and the display of instruction information by the liquid crystal display device 31 is not started.

  Next, at the timing (b), the reels of the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 start to rotate. At the timing (b), the display of the instruction information by the payout number display unit 16 is continuously performed, the instruction information command is not transmitted, and the display of the instruction information by the liquid crystal display device 31 is not started. .

  Next, at the timing (b-1), the instruction information command is transmitted from the main control board 300 to the sub control board 400. That is, the instruction information command is transmitted at a timing between “reel rotation start” at timing (b) and “stop button reception permission” at timing (c). At the timing (b-1), the display of the instruction information by the payout number display 16 is continuously performed.

  Next, at timing (b-2), the display of instruction information by the liquid crystal display device 31 is started. That is, after the instruction information command is transmitted at the timing from “reel rotation start” at timing (b) to “stop button acceptance permission” at timing (c), the liquid crystal display device 31 The display of the instruction information is started. At the timing (b-2), the display of the instruction information by the payout number display unit 16 is continuously performed.

  Next, at timing (c), reception of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 is permitted. At the timing (c), the display of the instruction information by the payout number display device 16 and the display of the instruction information by the liquid crystal display device 31 are continuously performed.

  Next, at timing (d), when all the stop buttons of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 are operated, the instruction information is displayed on the payout number display 16 and the liquid crystal display device is displayed. The display of the instruction information by 31 is not displayed. That is, in the fourth specific example of FIG. 53, the display end of the instruction information by the payout number display 16 and the display end of the instruction information by the liquid crystal display device 31 are at the same timing (synchronized).

  Next, at timing (e), when all stop buttons of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 have been operated, "combination of symbols related to winning" is displayed. The medal will be paid out. At the time of paying out medals, the payout number display 16 displays the payout number of medals corresponding to the “combination of symbols related to winning”, and the “combination of symbols related to winning” is displayed on the liquid crystal display 31. An image indicating that it has been displayed (an image indicating the number of medals paid out or an image indicating that a medal has been acquired) will be displayed. At timing (d), the display of the instruction information on the payout number display 16 is ended, so that it is clearly distinguished from the display of the payout number of medals displayed on the payout number display 16 at the timing (e). be able to. Further, the first specific example to the fourth specific example shown in FIGS. 50 to 53 have been described as examples. However, these specific examples are merely examples, and the transmission start timing of the instruction information command, the number of payouts, and the like. The display start timing of the display 16 and the liquid crystal display device 31 can be changed as appropriate.

(First specific example of display mode of payout number display and liquid crystal display)
Next, a first specific example of the display mode of the payout number display and the liquid crystal display device will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, as shown in FIG. 54A, when the state managed by the main control board 300 is “ART state”, the main control board 300 performs “push order” of the winning number “14” by the internal lottery process. The operation sequence of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 for displaying the “combination of symbols relating to the bell” on the active line in an advantageous manner for the player when “Bell C” is won. Is notified, the payout number display 16 is controlled. Specifically, the main control board 300 notifies that the middle stop button 12 is operated first by performing control to turn on the eighth segment 16h and the sixteenth segment 16p of the payout number display unit 16. Then, the sub control board 400 performs control for displaying an image for informing that the middle stop button 12 is first operated on the liquid crystal display device 31 via the effect control board 500.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 54B, in the main control board 300, the operation of the middle stop button 12 is first detected while the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 are rotating. In this case, control is performed to stop the middle reel 19. Then, the main control board 300 performs control for switching the display mode of the payout number display 16. Specifically, the main control board 300 controls the payout number display 16 in order to notify a stop button to be operated next among stop buttons corresponding to the rotating reels. Here, at the timing of FIG. 54B, the main control board 300 notifies that the left stop button 11 is operated by performing control to turn on the eighth segment 16h. ) Since the stop button of either the left stop button 11 or the right stop button 13 may be operated at the timing of), the fact that the right stop button 13 is operated is notified by turning on the 16th segment 16p. It is good. Note that at the timing at which any stop button can be operated as in the timing of FIG. 54 (B), all the segments from the first segment 16a to the sixteenth segment 16p of the payout number display 16 are turned off. It is good.

  Further, at the timing of FIG. 54B, the sub control board 400 performs control for switching the image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 31 via the effect control board 500. Specifically, the sub control board 400 is based on an image informing that the middle stop button 12 is first operated via the effect control board 500 in a state where the left reel 18 and the right reel 20 are rotating. Then, control is performed to switch to an image for informing that any of the stop buttons of the left stop button 11 and the right stop button 13 may be operated.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 54C, when the operation of the left stop button 11 is detected in a state where the left reel 18 and the right reel 20 are rotating, the main control board 300 detects the left reel. The control which stops 18 is performed. Then, the main control board 300 performs control for switching the display mode of the payout number display 16. Specifically, the main control board 300 controls the payout number display 16 in order to notify a stop button to be operated next among stop buttons corresponding to the rotating reels. Here, at the timing of FIG. 54C, the main control board 300 notifies that the right stop button 13 is operated by performing control to turn on the 16th segment 16p.

  Further, at the timing of FIG. 54C, the sub-control board 400 performs control to switch the image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 31. Specifically, the sub-control board 400 detects the right stop button from an image informing that any one of the left stop button 11 and the right stop button 13 may be operated via the effect control board 500. Control which switches to the image which alert | reports performing 13 operation is performed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 54D, the main control board 300 performs control to switch the display mode of the payout number display 16 when the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 are stopped. Specifically, the main control board 300 confirms that the operation of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 has been completed by performing control to turn off the first segment 16a to the sixteenth segment 16p. We are reporting.

  Further, at the timing of FIG. 54D, the sub-control board 400 performs control to switch the image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 31. Specifically, the sub-control board 400 indicates that the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 have stopped from an image informing that the right stop button 13 is operated via the effect control board 500. Control to switch to the image to be notified.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 54E, the main control board 300 performs control to switch the display mode of the payout number display 16 when the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 are stopped. Specifically, in the main control board 300, the “design relating to the bell A” stops at the middle stage of the middle reel 19, and the “combination of the symbols relating to the fourth bell” is set to the “lower right line”, “middle stage line”, And “9” (“3” × “3” line) medals to be paid out are displayed.

  In addition, at the timing of FIG. 54E, the sub control board 400 performs control to switch the image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 31. Specifically, the sub-control board 400 indicates that “the combination of symbols related to the bell” is displayed on the active line from the image informing that the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 are stopped. Control to switch to the image to be notified.

(Second specific example of display mode of payout number display and liquid crystal display)
Next, a second specific example of the display mode of the payout number display device and the liquid crystal display device will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, as shown in FIG. 55 (A), when the “common bell” of the winning number “17” is won by the internal lottery process, the main control board 300 has the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right Regardless of the order in which the stop button 13 is operated, the “combination of symbols related to the fourth bell” is displayed on the active line, so that information relating to the winning combination, for example, the left stop button 11, middle The operation order of the stop button 12 and the right stop button 13 is not notified to the payout number display 16. On the other hand, the sub-control board 400 performs control to display an image notifying that the “common bell” is determined as the winning combination on the liquid crystal display device 31 via the effect control board 500.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 55 (B), the main control board 300 allows the left stop switch 11sw to operate the left stop button 11 while the left reel 18, the middle reel 19 and the right reel 20 are rotating. Based on the detection, control for stopping the left reel 18 is performed. Also at this timing, information relating to the winning combination, for example, the operation order of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 is not notified to the payout number display 16. On the other hand, from FIG. 55A, the sub-control board 400 continuously displays an image notifying that the “common bell” is determined as the winning combination on the liquid crystal display device 31 via the effect control board 500. Take control.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 55 (C), in the main control board 300, when the left reel 18 is stopped and the middle reel 19 and the right reel 20 are rotating, the middle stop switch 12sw is set to the middle stop button 12. Based on the detected operation, the control to stop the middle reel 19 is performed. Also at this timing, information relating to the winning combination, for example, the operation order of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 is not notified to the payout number display 16. On the other hand, from FIG. 55A, the sub-control board 400 continuously displays an image notifying that the “common bell” is determined as the winning combination on the liquid crystal display device 31 via the effect control board 500. Take control.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 55D, in the main control board 300, when the left reel 18 and the middle reel 19 are stopped and the right reel 20 is rotating, the right stop switch 13sw is moved to the right stop button 13. Based on the detected operation, the control to stop the right reel 20 is performed. Also at this timing, information relating to the winning combination, for example, the operation order of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 is not notified to the payout number display 16. On the other hand, from FIG. 55A, the sub-control board 400 continuously displays an image notifying that the “common bell” is determined as the winning combination on the liquid crystal display device 31 via the effect control board 500. Take control.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 55 (E), in the main control board 300, the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 are stopped, and “the combination of symbols related to the fourth bell” is displayed on the upper line. Therefore, control is performed to pay out “3” medals. Further, the main control board 300 performs control for notifying the payout number display 16 that “3” medals have been paid out. On the other hand, from FIG. 55A, the sub-control board 400 continuously displays an image notifying that the “common bell” is determined as the winning combination on the liquid crystal display device 31 via the effect control board 500. Take control.

  55A to 55E are described as specific examples of display modes of the payout number display 16 and the liquid crystal display device 31 when the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “ART state”. However, for example, a specific example of the display mode of the payout number display 16 and the liquid crystal display device 31 when the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “normal state” is shown in FIG. It becomes a display mode. That is, when the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “normal state” and the “common bell” is won, the payout number display unit 16 does not display information related to the winning combination. Thereby, for example, even if an effect indicating that either “Common Bell” or “Cherry” is won is executed, the information related to “Common Bell” is not displayed on the payout number display 16. It can prevent that an effect is impaired.

(Third specific example of display mode of payout number display and liquid crystal display)
Next, a third specific example of the display mode of the payout number display device and the liquid crystal display device will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, as shown in FIG. 56 (A), when the “weak cherry” with the winning number “20” is won by the internal lottery process, the main control board 300 receives the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right By operating the stop button 13 at an appropriate timing, the “combination of symbols related to the first cherry” is displayed on the active line, so that information related to the winning combination, for example, the left stop button 11, middle The operation order of the stop button 12 and the right stop button 13 is not notified to the payout number display 16. On the other hand, the sub-control board 400 controls the liquid crystal display device 31 to display an image notifying that “Cherry” has been determined as a winning combination via the effect control board 500.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 56 (B), the main control board 300 allows the left stop switch 11sw to operate the left stop button 11 while the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 are rotating. Based on the detection, control for stopping the left reel 18 is performed. Also at this timing, information relating to the winning combination, for example, the operation order of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 is not notified to the payout number display 16. On the other hand, from FIG. 56A, the sub-control board 400 continues to display an image notifying that “Cherry” has been determined as a winning combination on the liquid crystal display device 31 via the effect control board 500. I do.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 56C, in the main control board 300, the middle stop switch 12sw is set to the middle stop button 12 in a state where the left reel 18 is stopped and the middle reel 19 and the right reel 20 are rotating. Based on the detected operation, the control to stop the middle reel 19 is performed. Also at this timing, information relating to the winning combination, for example, the operation order of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 is not notified to the payout number display 16. On the other hand, from FIG. 56A, the sub-control board 400 continues to display an image notifying that “Cherry” has been determined as a winning combination on the liquid crystal display device 31 via the effect control board 500. I do.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 56D, in the main control board 300, when the left reel 18 and the middle reel 19 are stopped and the right reel 20 is rotating, the right stop switch 13sw is moved to the right stop button 13. Based on the detected operation, the control to stop the right reel 20 is performed. Also at this timing, information relating to the winning combination, for example, the operation order of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 is not notified to the payout number display 16. On the other hand, from FIG. 56A, the sub-control board 400 continues to display an image notifying that “Cherry” has been determined as a winning combination on the liquid crystal display device 31 via the effect control board 500. I do.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 56 (E), in the main control board 300, the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 are stopped, and “the combination of symbols relating to the first cherry” is displayed on the upper line. Therefore, “2” medals are paid out. Further, the main control board 300 performs control for notifying the payout number display 16 that “2” medals have been paid out. On the other hand, from FIG. 56A, the sub-control board 400 continues to display an image notifying that “Cherry” has been determined as a winning combination on the liquid crystal display device 31 via the effect control board 500. I do.

  In FIG. 56, “a combination of symbols related to cherries” is displayed on the active line, and the payout number display 16 indicates that “2” medals have been paid out.

  56A to 56E are described as specific examples of display modes of the payout number display 16 and the liquid crystal display device 31 when the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “ART state”. However, for example, a specific example of the display mode of the payout number display 16 and the liquid crystal display device 31 when the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “normal state” is shown in FIG. It becomes a display mode. That is, when “Cherry” is won when the state managed by the main control board 300 is “normal state”, the information relating to the winning combination is not displayed on the payout number display 16. Thereby, for example, even if an effect indicating that either “common bell” or “cherry” is won is executed, the information related to “cherry” is not displayed on the payout number display 16, so the effect Can be prevented from being damaged.

  For example, “weak watermelon” with winning number “18”, “strong watermelon” with winning number “19”, “weak cherry” with winning number “20”, “strong cherry” with winning number “21”, winning number “22” “Special role” of “”, and “Weak watermelon + red BB” with winning number “27” and “Weak watermelon +” with winning number “28” where these winning roles and “bonus” are duplicated “Black BB”, “weak watermelon + red RB” with winning number “29”, “weak watermelon + black RB” with winning number “30”, “strong watermelon + red BB” with winning number “31”, Winning number “32” “strong watermelon + black BB”, winning number “33” “strong watermelon + red RB”, winning number “34” “strong watermelon + black RB”, and winning number “35” “Weak cherry + red BB”, winning number “36” “weak cherry + black BB” and winning number “37” “Weak cherry + red RB”, “weak cherry + black RB” with winning number “38”, “strong cherry + red BB” with winning number “39”, “strong cherry + black” with winning number “40” "BB", winning number "41" "strong cherry + red RB", winning number "42" "strong cherry + black RB", winning number "43" "special role + red BB", winning When “Special Role + Black BB” with Number “44”, “Special Role + Red RB” with Winning Number “45”, and “Special Role + Black RB” with Winning Number “46” are determined as Winning Roles In other words, the main control board 300 does not control the display related to the operation order in the payout number display 16 and hides the payout number display 16. In the present embodiment, since the maximum value of medals that can be used in one game is “3”, the payout number display 16 is not displayed for winning combinations with a payout number of “3” or less. However, in a gaming machine in which the maximum value of medals that can be used in one game is “2”, the payout number display 16 is not displayed for a winning combination with a payout number of “2” or less. In a gaming machine in which the maximum number of medals that can be used in one game is “1”, a payout number display 16 for a winning combination with a payout number of “1” or less. Can be configured to be hidden. Note that the configuration in which the payout number display 16 is not displayed for the winning combination having the relationship of “payout number ≦ insertion number” is applied when the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “ART state”. You may make it, and you may apply regardless of the state managed by the main control board 300. FIG. For example, it may be applied when the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “normal state”.

  Therefore, “weak watermelon” with winning number “18”, “strong watermelon” with winning number “19”, “weak cherry” with winning number “20”, “strong cherry” with winning number “21”, winning number “22” ”Of the“ special role ”, since it is not necessary to control the payout number display 16, the main control board 300 promptly notifies the operation order of the left stop button 11, middle stop button 12, and right stop button 13. In this way, the control load can be reduced.

(Fourth specific example of display mode of payout number display and liquid crystal display)
Next, a fourth specific example of the display mode of the payout number display device and the liquid crystal display device will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, as shown in FIG. 57 (A), when the state managed by the main control board 300 is “ART state”, the main control board 300 performs “normal replay” of the winning number “01” by the internal lottery process. "Is selected, the sub-control board 400 does not control the display related to the operation order on the payout number display 16 and the sub-control board 400 displays an image indicating" Replay "on the liquid crystal display device 31 via the effect control board 500. Control the display.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 57 (B), the main control board 300 first detects the operation of the left stop button 11 while the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 are rotating. In this case, control is performed to stop the left reel 18. In FIG. 57B as well, the main control board 300 does not control the display related to the operation sequence in the payout number display 16, and the sub control board 400 does not control the liquid crystal via the effect control board 500. Control is performed to display an image indicating “replay” on the display device 31.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 57 (C), the main control board 300 detects that the middle reel 19 and the right reel 20 are rotating and the operation of the middle stop button 12 is detected. The control which stops 19 is performed. Also in FIG. 57C, the main control board 300 does not control the display related to the operation sequence in the payout number display 16, and the sub control board 400 does not control the liquid crystal via the effect control board 500. Control is performed to display an image indicating “replay” on the display device 31.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 57D, the main control board 300 controls the right reel 20 to stop when the operation of the right stop button 13 is detected in a state where the right reel 20 is rotating. I do. Also in FIG. 57D, the main control board 300 does not control the display related to the operation sequence in the payout number display 16, and the sub control board 400 does not control the liquid crystal via the effect control board 500. Control is performed to display an image indicating “replay” on the display device 31.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 57 (E), when the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 are stopped, the main control board 300 performs “normal replay” of the winning number “01” by the internal lottery process. Since the payout is not performed, the main control board 300 does not control the payout number display 16. On the other hand, the sub control board 400 displays an image showing “Replay” on the liquid crystal display device 31 via the effect control board 500, and erases the image showing “Replay” after a predetermined time.

  57A to 57E are described as specific examples of display modes of the payout number display 16 and the liquid crystal display device 31 when the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “ART state”. However, for example, a specific example of the display form of the payout number display 16 and the liquid crystal display device 31 when the state managed by the main control board 300 is “normal state” is shown in FIG. It becomes a display mode. That is, when the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “normal state” and the “normal replay” is won, the information relating to the winning combination is not displayed on the payout number display 16. Thereby, for example, even if an effect indicating that either “common bell” or “normal replay” is won is executed, information related to “normal replay” is not displayed on the payout number display 16. It can prevent that a production effect is spoiled.

  In the “normal replay” of the winning number “01”, the main control board 300 does not control the display related to the operation order on the payout number display 16 and hides the payout number display 16. Winning number “02” “Replay during RT1” to Winning number “05” “Replaying during RT1”, Winning number “06” from “Replaying during RT2” to Winning number “08” “Replay during RT2” In order to notify the operation sequence when the specific condition is satisfied when winning number “09” “Replay during RT3” to “Replaying during RT3” with winning number “11” is won, The payout number display 16 is controlled.

  Here, the “specific condition” means that, for example, when the state managed by the main control board 300 is “normal state”, the ART preparation state transition lottery is won, and “RT1 replay during the winning number“ 02 ”is won. A case where any one of “A” to “Replay D in RT1” of the winning number “05” is won can be applied.

  Further, the “specific condition” is “RT2 replay A” of the winning number “06” to “RT2 in the RT2” of the winning number “08” when the state managed by the main control board 300 is “ART ready state”. A case where one of “Replay C” is won can be applied.

  The “specific condition” is “RT3” of the winning number “09” after the ART state game number counter becomes “0” when the state managed by the main control board 300 is “ART state”. The case where “Replay C during RT3” of “Replay A” to “11” is won can be applied.

  That is, the winning number “01” to the winning number “11” are winning combinations categorized as “replay”, but in the situation where a specific condition is satisfied such as “push order replay”, the operation order When there is a need to notify the payout number display unit 16, the operation order is notified. On the other hand, if the operation number notification is not required, such as “Normal Replay” of the winning number “01”, The display unit 16 does not control display related to the operation order, and the payout number display unit 16 is not displayed. Therefore, in the main control board 300, the control load can be reduced while promptly informing the operation order.

(Fifth specific example of display mode of payout number display and liquid crystal display)
Next, a fifth specific example of the display mode of the payout number display and the liquid crystal display will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, as shown in FIG. 58 (A), when the state managed by the main control board 300 is “ART state”, the main control board 300, for example, “ When the “weak watermelon + red BB” is won, the sub-control board 400 controls the liquid crystal display device 31 via the effect control board 500 to “watermelon” without controlling the display related to the operation order in the payout number display 16. Is displayed. In FIG. 58A, when the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 are all operated and the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 are stopped, "" Shows that the "combination of symbols related to watermelon" is stopped.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 58 (B), when the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 are stopped, the main control board 300 displays “a combination of symbols related to watermelon” "Is stopped, the main control board 300 controls the payout number display 16. Specifically, the main control board 300 performs control to notify that “3” medals are paid out corresponding to “a combination of symbols related to watermelon”. On the other hand, the sub control board 400 displays an image indicating “watermelon” on the liquid crystal display device 31 via the effect control board 500, and erases the image indicating “watermelon” after a predetermined time.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 58 (C), the main control board 300 executes, for example, a continuous effect in the next game of FIG. 58 (B), and simultaneously becomes “bonus” by winning “watermelon”. It is notified whether or not a lottery for shifting to the “ART ready state” is won or not.

  In the game in FIG. 58C, it is assumed that “push order bell C” is won as the winning combination. However, the operation order for displaying the “combination of symbols related to the bell” on the active line in an advantageous manner for the player is not notified. In this way, until the game shown in FIG. 58D, which will be described later, is notified that the “bonus” is won in the game shown in FIG. 58D, the “push order bell” is won. Even in such a case, it is possible to win the “bonus” by not reporting the operation order of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 with the payout number display 16 and the liquid crystal display device 31 or the like. It is possible to prevent the player from perceiving whether or not the “bonus” has been won before the game for notifying that the player is playing.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 58 (D), “bonus” established in the game of FIG. 58 (A) is notified in the next game of FIG. 58 (C). Specifically, the sub control board 400 performs control for displaying an image for informing that the “bonus” is established via the effect control board 500. In the game of FIG. 58D, it is assumed that “push order bell C” is won as the winning combination. In this case, since the game notifies the player that the “bonus” has been won, the main control board 300 displays the “combination of symbols related to the bell” on the active line in an advantageous manner for the player. In order to notify the operation order of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13, the payout number display 16 is controlled. Specifically, the main control board 300 notifies that the middle stop button 12 is operated first by performing control to turn on the eighth segment 16h and the sixteenth segment 16p of the payout number display unit 16. On the other hand, the sub-control board 400 performs control for displaying an image for informing that the middle stop button 12 is first operated on the liquid crystal display device 31 via the effect control board 500. In other words, when the “push order bell” is won in the subsequent games including the game for notifying that “bonus” is won, the payout number display 16 and the liquid crystal display 31 etc. The operation order of the button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 is notified.

  In the example of FIG. 58 (D), it is assumed that “push order bell C” has been won as the winning combination, so according to the notification, the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 is operated, "Combination of symbols related to the 4th bell" is displayed on the active line in an advantageous manner for the player, and "9" ("3" x "3" line) medals are paid out. Is done. In this way, for the winning combination that has the relationship of “insertion number <payout number” and that has an operation order, the main control board 300 includes a game that includes a game for notifying that “bonus” has been won. In FIG. 58, the payout number display unit 16 is controlled. For example, in the game after FIG. 58 (C), when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the payout number display unit 16 displays the operation order. The payout number display 16 is not displayed without performing control.

  Here, the “predetermined condition” applies to a case where a winning combination that can display a combination of symbols having a relationship of “the number of coins to be paid ≦ the number of coins to be inserted” among “the symbol combinations related to winning” is applied. Can do. For example, “weak watermelon” with winning number “18”, “strong watermelon” with winning number “19”, “weak cherry” with winning number “20”, “strong cherry” with winning number “21”, winning number “22” When the “special role” is selected, the main control board 300 does not control the display related to the operation order in the payout number display 16 and hides the payout number display 16.

  In addition, as a “predetermined condition”, even when the stop button is operated at any timing, the “common bell” of the winning number “17” that can display “the combination of symbols related to the fourth bell” is won. The case can be applied.

  As the “predetermined condition”, as shown in FIG. 58 (E), in the next game of FIG. 58 (D), when “losing” of the winning number “00” is won by the internal lottery process, “bonus” Only the case where it is determined as a winning combination can be applied.

  Also, during the period from the game winning “bonus” to the game informing that “bonus” has been won, even if the “push order bell” is won, the payout number display 16 and the liquid crystal display Since the operation order using the device 31 is not notified, the “bonus” is won from the contents displayed on the payout number display 16 before the game informing that the “bonus” is won. This can be prevented from being detected. 58A, the main control board 300 determines the instruction effect provided in the main ROM 302 based on the fact that “weak watermelon + red BB” with the winning number “27” is won by the internal lottery process. With reference to the table (see FIG. 18B), the continuous effect can be determined in the process of step S110-12 of the information setting process (see FIG. 33) in the main loop process. Then, the determined number of continuous production games is set in the continuous production counter provided in the main RAM 303, and the continuous production counter is subtracted for each “1” game until the value of the continuous production counter becomes “0”. Is configured to transmit “no instruction” as the content indicated by the instruction information command even if one of “push order bell A” to “push order bell E” is won (or instruction information In the subsequent games including the game in which the continuous effect counter is “0” and the “bonus” is notified, the “push order bell A” is set. ”To“ push order bell E ”, the contents (for example,“ 321 ”etc.) indicated by the instruction information command corresponding to the selected“ push order bell A ”to“ push order bell E ”are selected. Send Thus, the game prior to the game informing that the “bonus” is won does not control the display related to the operation order, and after the game informing that the “bonus” is won, the operation order It is comprised so that the display control concerning may be performed. It should be noted that the number of games for continuous production is related to production and the number of games, and the number of games may be determined by determining the production, or the production and the number of games may be determined separately. You may comprise.

(Example of relationship between ID, operation order, and display mode of payout number display)
Next, an example of the relationship between the ID, the operation order, and the display mode of the payout number display will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 59A is a diagram showing a correspondence relationship between IDs and operation orders, and winning combinations other than “push order replay”, “push order bell”, “push order replay”, and “push order bell”. , The operation order is associated with the corresponding ID. For example, “RT1 replay A” of the winning number “02” is operated by operating the middle stop button 12 (described as “middle” in FIG. 59A) first and then the left stop button 11 as the operation order. (Described as “left” in FIG. 59 (A)), and finally operating the right stop button 13 (described as “right” in FIG. 59 (A)) is specified. “1” is defined. The ID is displayed on the payout number display 16 controlled by the main control board 300. In the “first RT gaming state”, the ID “1” is displayed on the payout number display 16 under the control of the main control board 300. ”Is displayed,“ Middle ”→“ Left ”→“ Right ”, which is the operation sequence of the stop button for displaying“ Combination of symbols related to the second RT gaming state transition replay ”, is indirectly set. Will be informed.

  Similarly, “RT1 replay B” of the winning number “03” has an ID “2” corresponding to the operation order “middle” → “right” → “left”, and the winning number “04”. “RT1 replay C” has an ID “3” corresponding to the operation sequence “right” → “left” → “middle”, and the winning number “05” “replay during RT1” The ID “4” is defined in correspondence with the operation order “right” → “middle” → “left”, and the winning number “06” “RT2 replay A” has the operation order “left” → “ Corresponding to “-” → “-” (“−” can be any stop button), ID “5” is defined, and “Replay B in RT2” with winning number “07” is the operation sequence “ ID “6” is defined corresponding to “medium” → “−” → “−”, and “RT2 replay C” with winning number “08” The ID “7” is defined corresponding to “right” → “−” → “−”, and “replay A during RT3” with the winning number “09” is the operation order “left” → “−” → “ “8” is defined in correspondence with “−”, and “replay B during RT3” of the winning number “10” corresponds to the operation order “medium” → “−” → “−”. “9” is defined, and “Replay C during RT3” of the winning number “11” is defined with an ID “10” corresponding to the operation order “right” → “−” → “−”. The “push order bell A” of the winning number “12” has an ID “11” corresponding to the operation order “left” → “middle” → “right”, and the winning number “13” has “ The “push order bell B” has an ID “12” corresponding to the operation order “left” → “right” → “middle”, and the “push order bell C” of the winning number “14” The ID “13” is defined corresponding to the order “middle” → “−” → “−”, and the “push order bell D” of the winning number “15” is the operation order “right” → “left”. → ID “14” is defined corresponding to “middle”, and “push order bell E” of winning number “16” corresponds to operation sequence “right” → “middle” → “left” ID “15” is defined, and for other winning numbers (other than the above), ID “99” is defined corresponding to the operation order “no instruction”.

  Next, FIG. 59 (B) shows a state in which the above-described ID is displayed on the payout number display 16. In FIG. 59B, since the payout number display 16 displays ID “3”, the winning number “04” “RT1 replay C” is won and corresponds to “RT1 replay C”. The operation order “right” → “left” → “middle” is indirectly notified.

  The above-described ID is configured to be displayed on the payout number display unit 16, but may be configured to be displayed on a display capable of displaying “three digits” as shown in FIG. 59 (C). Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 59D, the display may be performed on a display capable of displaying “one digit”. In addition, when performing ID display using a display capable of displaying “one digit”, the ID may be displayed in “binary number” according to the number of winning numbers.

(Example of relationship between instruction contents, ID, and display mode of payout number display)
Next, based on FIG. 60, an example of the relationship between the instruction content, the ID, and the display mode of the payout number display will be described.

  FIG. 60A is a diagram showing a correspondence relationship between the instruction content and the ID. For example, the correspondence relationship between the instruction content and the ID when the “push order bell C” of the winning number “14” is won is shown. ing. The “push order bell C” is the operation order “middle” → “−” → “−” (“−” can be any stop button), and “the combination of symbols related to the fourth bell” is the player. Since it can be displayed on the active line in an advantageous manner to the sub-control board 400, the instruction content to be transmitted from the main control board 300 to the sub-control board 400 includes the first operation of the middle stop button 12 "instruction of left or middle press" ID “1” is defined for the instruction content “”, and the ID “2” is specified for the instruction content “instruct to press right or middle” including first operating the middle stop button 12. ”Is defined, and when the winning number“ 14 ”“ push order bell C ”is won, any ID is selected.

  FIG. 60B is a diagram showing an example of displaying the ID on the payout number display 16. For example, when the state managed by the main control board 300 is “ART state”, FIG. When “1” is selected, the main control board 300 controls the payout number display 16. Specifically, the main control board 300 displays ID “1” by performing control to turn on the tenth segment 16j and the eleventh segment 16k of the payout number display unit 16. In addition, the sub control board 400 is an image showing a notification that the liquid crystal display device 31 is operated first by selecting either the left stop button 11 or the middle stop button 12 via the effect control board 500. “?” Is displayed, and the right stop button 13 displays “x”, which is an image indicating notification that is not operated first. That is, in the example of FIG. 60, when the “effect R” described in the instruction effect determination table (see FIG. 18) provided in the main ROM 302 is selected, a stop button to be operated first is predicted to the player. The game that hits the operation order is configured. In a game in which such an operation order is applied, the main control board 300 displays the ID on the payout number display 16 to indirectly notify the operation order.

(Example of relationship between operation order, ID, and display mode of payout number display)
Next, an example of the relationship between the operation order, the ID, and the display mode of the payout number display will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 61 shows an example of displaying on the payout number display 16 using a common ID when the winning combination is different but the operation order is the same. For example, as shown in FIG. 61A, the operation order and the corresponding ID are determined. When the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “ART state” and the “push order bell C” of the winning number “14” is won, as shown in FIG. 61 (B), The main control board 300 controls the payout number display 16. Specifically, the main control board 300 lights the ninth segment 16i, the tenth segment 16j, the twelfth segment 16l, the thirteenth segment 16m, and the fifteenth segment 16o of the payout number display unit 16. By performing the control, ID “2” indicating that the middle stop button 12 is operated first is displayed. In addition, the sub control board 400 performs control for displaying an image for informing the liquid crystal display device 31 that the middle stop button 12 is first operated and an image indicating “bell” via the effect control board 500. . On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 61 (C), when the state managed by the main control board 300 is “ART ready state”, when “Replay B during RT2” with the winning number “07” is won. The main control board 300 controls the payout number display 16 to display, for example, ID “2” indicating that the middle stop button 12 is operated first, and the sub control board 400 displays the effect control board 500. Accordingly, control is performed to display on the liquid crystal display device 31 an image for notifying that the middle stop button 12 is first operated and an image indicating “replay”.

(Relationship between winning number and payout number display mode)
Next, based on FIG. 62, the relationship between the winning number and the display mode of the payout number display will be described.

  As described above, when the main control board 300 performs a notification that prompts the user to operate the left stop button 11, the main control board 300 turns on the eighth segment 16 h of the payout number display 16 and notifies the user to operate the middle stop button 12. In the case of performing, the eighth segment 16h and the sixteenth segment 16p of the payout number display unit 16 are turned on, and in the case of performing a notification prompting the operation of the right stop button 13, the 16th segment 16p of the payout number display unit 16 is displayed. However, the display mode of the payout number display unit 16 is not limited to such a display mode.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 62A, the main control board 300 pays out the winning number corresponding to “push order bell A” when “push order bell A” is determined by the internal lottery process. It is good also as performing control displayed on the number display 16. Thereby, the player who recognizes the winning combination corresponding to the winning number recognizes the operation order of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 by checking the payout number display 16. be able to. On the other hand, even if the player does not recognize the winning combination corresponding to the winning number, the sub control board 400 causes the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 via the effect control board 500. Thus, the operation order of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 can be recognized by checking the liquid crystal display device 31.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 62 (B), when the winning number is displayed on the payout number display 16, it may be displayed in binary. In this case, when the “push order bell A” is determined by the internal lottery process, the main control board 300 performs control to display the winning number corresponding to “push order bell A” in binary. Specifically, the main control board 300 displays the third segment 16c of the payout number display 16 corresponding to the “second bit” and the fourth segment 16d of the payout number display 16 corresponding to the “third bit”. When it is lit, the winning number “12” is displayed. Thereby, the player who recognizes the winning combination corresponding to the winning number recognizes the operation order of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 by checking the payout number display 16. be able to. On the other hand, even if the player does not recognize the winning combination corresponding to the winning number, the sub control board 400 causes the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 via the effect control board 500. Thus, the operation order of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 can be recognized by checking the liquid crystal display device 31.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, the payout number display 16 displays the operation order of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13, and the number of medals to be paid out to the player. Thereby, there is no need to separately provide a display for displaying the operation order of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13, so that an increase in the number of parts can be prevented. Furthermore, since it is not necessary to change the hardware specifications from the conventional gaming machine, the cost can be reduced.

  In contrast to this, a “7-segment LED” is provided separately from the payout number display device 16, and the operation order of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 is displayed on the separately provided “7-segment LED”. It is good to do. Thereby, the operation order of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 can be displayed even at the timing of displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player.

  In this case, the payout number display unit 16 may be a three-digit “7-segment LED” as shown in FIG. 62 (C) instead of the two-digit “7-segment LED”. As shown in D), it may be a single-digit “7-segment LED”.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 62 (C), in the case where the information related to the winning combination is displayed on the 3-digit “7-segment LED”, a larger number can be displayed. In this case, in FIG. 62C, the winning number is displayed, but the above-described ID may be notified, and the operation order of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 is displayed. May be notified.

  In FIG. 62C, a decimal value is displayed, but a hexadecimal value may be displayed, or a binary value may be displayed.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 62 (D), when information related to the winning combination is displayed on the 1-digit “7-segment LED”, as shown in FIG. 62 (C), the 3-digit “7-segment LED” The cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the information related to the winning combination is displayed in “”. In this case, in FIG. 62D, the winning number is displayed, but the ID described above may be notified, and the operation order of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 is displayed. May be notified.

  In FIG. 62C, a binary value is displayed, but a hexadecimal value may be displayed, or a decimal value may be displayed. However, when displaying information related to the winning combination in the 1-digit “7-segment LED”, displaying information related to the winning combination in the 2-digit “7-segment LED”, or the 3-digit “7-segment LED” Since a value that can be displayed is smaller than that in the case of displaying information related to the winning combination, it is preferable to display a binary value.

(First specific example of relationship between operation sequence of stop button and display mode of payout number display)
Next, a first specific example of the relationship between the winning combination and the display mode of the payout number display will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, as shown in FIG. 63A, when the state managed by the main control board 300 is “ART state”, the main control board 300 performs “push order” of the winning number “14” by the internal lottery process. The operation sequence of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 for displaying the “combination of symbols relating to the bell” on the active line in an advantageous manner for the player when “Bell C” is won. Is notified, the payout number display 16 is controlled. Specifically, the main control board 300 includes the second segment 16b, the third segment 16c, the tenth segment 16j, the eleventh segment 16k, the fourteenth segment 16n, and the fifteenth segment of the payout number display unit 16. 16o is turned on to notify that the middle stop button 12 is operated first. In this specific example, the winning number “14” is displayed on the payout number display 16 as it is to indirectly notify that the middle stop button 12 is operated first. Then, the sub control board 400 performs control for displaying an image for informing that the middle stop button 12 is first operated on the liquid crystal display device 31 via the effect control board 500.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 63B, the main control board 300 first detects the operation of the left stop button 11 while the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 are rotating. In this case, control is performed to stop the left reel 18. In FIG. 63 (A), it is notified that the middle stop button 12 is operated first. However, in FIG. 63 (B), the player makes a mistake in the operation, and the left stop button 11 is first displayed. Indicates that it has been operated (operation error). When such an operation error occurs, the main control board 300 ends the display of the payout number display 16. Specifically, the main control board 300 includes the second segment 16b, the third segment 16c, the tenth segment 16j, the eleventh segment 16k, the fourteenth segment 16n, and the fifteenth segment of the payout number display unit 16. The display of the number-of-payout display 16 is terminated by performing control to turn off 16o. Further, the sub control board 400 performs control for displaying an image indicating that the stop button has been operated in an incorrect stop order via the effect control board 500.

  That is, in the first specific example of FIG. 63, the main control board 300 displays a display indicating that the middle stop button 12 is first operated on the payout number display 16 until a stop button operation error occurs. If the operation error of the stop button occurs, the display of the payout number display 16 by the main control board 300 is ended. In addition, in the sub control board 400, when an operation error occurs, the content to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 31 is switched via the effect control board 500.

(Second specific example of relationship between operation sequence of stop button and display mode of payout number display)
Next, a second specific example of the relationship between the winning combination and the display mode of the payout number display will be described with reference to FIG. Note that FIG. 64 is a diagram illustrating another example of FIG.

  In FIG. 64, the main control board 300 performs control to switch the display of the payout number display 16 when an operation error occurs. For example, control is performed to display on the payout number display 16 the content “FF” indicating that an operation error has occurred. That is, in the second specific example of FIG. 64, until the stop button operation error occurs, the main control board 300 displays a display indicating that the middle stop button 12 is first operated on the payout number display 16. If the operation error of the stop button occurs, the display content of the payout number display 16 by the main control board 300 is switched to the display mode when the operation error occurs.

(Third specific example of the relationship between the operation sequence of the stop button and the display mode of the payout number display)
Next, a third specific example of the relationship between the winning combination and the display mode of the payout number display will be described with reference to FIG. Note that FIG. 65 is a diagram illustrating another example of FIG.

  In FIG. 65, the main control board 300 performs control to continue the display of the payout number display 16 when an operation error occurs. That is, in the third specific example of FIG. 65, even when an operation error occurs, the main control board 300 displays that the middle stop button 12 is first operated on the payout number display 16. It will be done continuously.

  In addition, when the “push order bell” is won, if a mistake is made, a combination of symbols that will shift to a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player is displayed, and a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player In the gaming machine that shifts to, the main control board 300 notifies the payout number to avoid displaying a combination of symbols that shifts to a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player when an operation error occurs. You may display on the indicator 16. For example, the payout number display 16 displays a symbol position at which a symbol combination that makes a transition to a gaming state disadvantageous to the player cannot be stopped on the active line.

(Second Embodiment)
Hereinafter, the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 66 to 74.

(Sequence data table in the second embodiment)
Next, the array data table in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.

  The sequence data table in the second embodiment includes “a design related to red seven”, “a design related to black seven”, “a design related to blue seven”, “a design related to blank”, and “a design related to red cherry”. A symbol, a symbol related to black cherry, a symbol related to watermelon, a symbol related to bell, and a symbol related to replay are arranged.

(The symbol combination table in the second embodiment)
Next, the symbol combination table in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.

  The symbol combination table in the second embodiment is stored in the main ROM 302 and defines the symbol bit name, symbol combination name, symbol combination, and the number of medals to be paid out to the player. .

  In the symbol combination table in the second embodiment, “Red Seven BB” of symbol bit name “BNS01”, “Black Seven BB” of symbol bit name “BNS02”, and “Blue” of symbol bit name “BNS03” are displayed. “Seven BB”, “Red Seven RB” of symbol bit name “BNS04”, “Black Seven RB” of symbol bit name “BNS05”, “General Replay” of symbol bit name “REP01”, and Symbol bit name “ NML01 “red watermelon”, symbol bit name “NML02” “black watermelon”, symbol bit name “NML03” “blue watermelon”, symbol bit name “NML04” “bell” and symbol bit name “NML05” “red cherry” and symbol bit name “NML06” “black cherry” are defined.

  In the second embodiment, “a combination of symbols related to Red Seven BB”, “a combination of symbols related to Black Seven BB”, or “a combination of symbols related to Blue Seven BB” is displayed on the active line. In this case, the operation of BB (the accessory continuous operation device related to the first type special accessory) is performed, and the operation of BB is performed. Further, in the second embodiment, when “a combination of symbols related to red seven RB” or “a combination of symbols related to black seven RB” is displayed on the active line, an RB (type 1 special bonus) ) Is performed. When the operation of BB or the operation of RB is performed, it is advantageous for the player as compared to before the operation of BB or the operation of RB is performed.

  In the second embodiment, “the combination of symbols related to Red Seven BB”, “the combination of symbols related to Black Seven BB”, and “the combination of symbols related to Blue Seven BB” are collectively referred to as “BB. This is a combination of symbols. In addition, “a combination of symbols related to Red Seven RB” and “a combination of symbols related to Black Seven RB” are collectively referred to as “a combination of symbols related to RB”. Further, “the combination of symbols related to BB” and “the combination of symbols related to RB” are collectively referred to as “the combination of symbols related to bonus”.

  Further, in the second embodiment, when the “combination of symbols related to general replay” is displayed on the active line, the re-game is performed. When the re-game operation is performed, the game can be performed without inserting medals.

  Further, in the present embodiment, “a combination of symbols related to red watermelon”, “a combination of symbols related to black watermelon”, “a combination of symbols related to blue watermelon”, “a combination of symbols related to bell”, “a red cherry” The medal is paid out when the “combination of symbols related to” or “combination of symbols related to black cherry” is displayed on the active line.

  In the second embodiment, “the combination of symbols related to red watermelon”, “the combination of symbols related to black watermelon”, and “the combination of symbols related to blue watermelon” are collectively referred to as “the combination of symbols related to watermelon”. It is called “combination”, and “a combination of symbols related to red cherry” and “a combination of symbols related to black cherry” are collectively called “a combination of symbols related to cherry”.

  In the second embodiment, “the combination of symbols related to watermelon”, “the combination of symbols related to bell”, and “the combination of symbols related to cherry” are collectively referred to as “the combination of symbols related to winning”. .

(Relationship between winning role and winning a prize)
Next, based on FIG. 68, the relationship between the winning combination and winning a prize in the second embodiment will be described.

  In FIG. 68, a combination of a winning number corresponding to the winning combination, a winning combination, a condition device corresponding to the winning combination, whether or not each game state can be determined as a winning combination, and a symbol that can be displayed on the active line Shows the relationship.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 68, the condition device to be operated varies depending on the determined winning combination. For example, when “normal replay” with a winning number “01” is determined as a winning combination by an internal lottery process to be described later, the condition device to be operated is “REP01”. That is, when “normal replay” of the winning number “01” is determined as the winning combination, it is allowed to display “a combination of symbols related to general replay” on the active line.

  In the second embodiment, winning combinations having different combinations of symbols on the active line are provided depending on the symbol positions at which the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 are operated. For example, when “Watermelon A” with a winning number “02” is determined as a winning combination by the internal lottery process, the condition device that is to be activated is “NML01”. In this case, when the left stop button 11 is operated on the effective line of the left reel 18 at a position where the “red 7 related symbol” can be drawn, the “red watermelon related symbol combination” is displayed on the active line. Will be displayed. On the other hand, when the left stop button 11 is operated on the left reel 18 at a position where the “symbol relating to red seven” cannot be pulled in, the “combination of symbols relating to red watermelon” is displayed on the effective line. It will never be done.

  In the second embodiment, when the “watermelon B” with the winning number “03” is determined as the winning combination by the internal lottery process, the condition device that is activated is “NML02”. In this case, when the left stop button 11 is operated on the effective line of the left reel 18 at a position where the “black seven related symbol” can be drawn, the “black watermelon related symbol combination” is displayed on the effective line. Will be displayed. On the other hand, when the left stop button 11 is operated on the left reel 18 at a position where the “black seven related symbol” cannot be drawn, the “black watermelon related symbol combination” is displayed on the active line. It will never be done.

  In the second embodiment, when the “watermelon C” with the winning number “04” is determined as the winning combination by the internal lottery process, the condition device that is activated is “NML03”. In this case, when the left stop button 11 is operated on the effective line of the left reel 18 at a position where the “blue 7 related symbol” can be drawn, the “blue watermelon related symbol combination” is displayed on the active line. Will be displayed. On the other hand, when the left stop button 11 is operated on the effective line of the left reel 18 at a position where the “blue 7 related symbol” cannot be drawn, the “blue watermelon related symbol combination” is displayed on the active line. It will never be done.

  And, as shown in the arrangement data table (see FIG. 66) in the second embodiment, the positions where the “design related to red seven” of the left reel 18 can be drawn are “design related to black seven” and “blue seven The “design” is in a position where it cannot be drawn. In addition, the position where the “symbol related to the black seven” of the left reel 18 can be pulled in is the position where the “pattern related to the red seven” or the “design related to blue seven” cannot be pulled in. The position where the symbol related to “Seven” can be drawn in is a position where the symbol related to “Red Seven” and the symbol related to “Black Seven” cannot be drawn. Therefore, when “Watermelon A” with the winning number “02” is determined as the winning combination, “Watermelon B” with the winning number “03” is determined as the winning combination, or “Watermelon with the winning number“ 04 ” If “C” is determined as the winning combination, it is possible to win the “combination of symbols related to watermelon” with a probability of “1/3” without notifying which winning combination has been determined.

  On the other hand, when the state managed by the main control board 300 is “ART state” and “watermelon” is determined by the internal lottery process, “watermelon A”, “watermelon B”, Which of “watermelon C” has been determined is notified. As a result, the player, based on the notified information related to the winning combination, any one of the symbols “Red Seven”, “Black Seven”, and “Blue Seven” By operating the left stop button 11 at a timing at which it can be drawn on the effective line of the left reel 18, the probability of winning the “combination of watermelon symbols” can be set to “3/3”, that is, 100%. .

(First RT gaming state winning combination determination table in the second embodiment)
Next, the winning combination determination table for the first RT gaming state in the second embodiment will be described based on FIG.

  The first RT gaming state winning combination determination table in the second embodiment is stored in the main ROM 302 and is used when determining a winning combination by an internal lottery process described later in the “first RT gaming state”. In the first RT gaming state winning combination determination table in the second embodiment, a winning number, a winning combination, and a lottery value for each set value are defined. Here, in the second embodiment, the first RT gaming state winning combination determination table illustrates the lottery value when the setting value is “1” and the lottery value when the setting value is “6”. Illustration of a lottery value when the setting value is “2”, a lottery value when the setting value is “3”, a lottery value when the setting value is “4”, and a lottery value when the setting value is “5” Is omitted.

  In addition, the winning combination determination table for the first RT gaming state in the second embodiment includes “normal replay” of the winning number “01”, “watermelon A” of the winning number “02”, and “watermelon of the winning number“ 03 ”. “B”, “Watermelon C” with winning number “04”, “Common Bell” with winning number “05”, “Cherry RED” with winning number “06”, “Cherry BLK” with winning number “07” “Red BB” with winning number “08”, “Black BB” with winning number “09”, “Blue BB” with winning number “10”, “Red RB” with winning number “11”, Winning number “12” “Black RB”, Winning number “13” “Common Bell + Blue BB”, Winning number “14” “Cherry RED + Red BB”, Winning number “15” “Cherry RED +” "Red RB" and winning number "16" "Cherry BLK + Black BB" Lottery value to "cherry BLK + black RB" in the select number "17" are defined.

(Winning combination determination table for second RT gaming state in the second embodiment)
Next, the winning combination determination table for the second RT gaming state in the second embodiment will be described based on FIG.

  The second RT gaming state winning combination determination table in the second embodiment is stored in the main ROM 302 and is used when determining a winning combination by an internal lottery process described later in the “second RT gaming state”. In the second RT gaming state winning combination determination table in the second embodiment, the winning number, the contents of the winning number, and the lottery value for each set value are defined. Here, in the second embodiment, the second RT gaming state winning combination determination table illustrates the lottery value when the setting value is “1” and the lottery value when the setting value is “6”. Illustration of a lottery value when the setting value is “2”, a lottery value when the setting value is “3”, a lottery value when the setting value is “4”, and a lottery value when the setting value is “5” Is omitted.

  In addition, the second RT gaming state winning combination determination table in the second embodiment includes “normal replay” of the winning number “01”, “watermelon A” of the winning number “02”, and “watermelon of the winning number“ 03 ”. “B”, “Watermelon C” with winning number “04”, “Common Bell” with winning number “05”, “Cherry RED” with winning number “06”, “Cherry BLK” with winning number “07” “Red BB” with winning number “08”, “Black BB” with winning number “09”, “Blue BB” with winning number “10”, “Red RB” with winning number “11”, Winning number “12” “Black RB”, Winning number “13” “Common Bell + Blue BB”, Winning number “14” “Cherry RED + Red BB”, Winning number “15” “Cherry RED +” "Red RB" and winning number "16" "Cherry BLK + Black BB" Lottery value to "cherry BLK + black RB" in the select number "17" are defined.

(RB game state winning combination determination table in the second embodiment)
Next, based on FIG. 71, the winning combination determination table for RB gaming state in the second embodiment will be described.

  The RB gaming state winning combination determination table in the second embodiment is stored in the main ROM 302 and is used when determining a winning combination by an internal lottery process described later in the “RB gaming state”. In the RB gaming state winning combination determination table in the second embodiment, the winning number, the contents of the winning number, and the lottery value for each set value are defined. Here, in the second embodiment, the winning combination determination table for the RB gaming state illustrates the lottery value when the setting value is “1” and the lottery value when the setting value is “6”. A drawing of a lottery value when the value is “2”, a lottery value when the setting value is “3”, a lottery value when the setting value is “4”, and a lottery value when the setting value is “5” Omitted.

  Further, the winning combination determination table for the RB gaming state in the second embodiment includes “watermelon A” with a winning number “02”, “watermelon B” with a winning number “03”, and “watermelon C” with a winning number “04”. ”,“ Common Bell ”with a winning number“ 05 ”,“ Cherry RED ”with a winning number“ 06 ”, and“ Cherry BLK ”with a winning number“ 07 ”.

  In other words, the lottery value other than these is “0”, and when the lottery is performed using the winning combination determination table for the RB gaming state in the second embodiment, “normal replay” of the winning number “01” and the winning “Red BB” with the number “08”, “Black BB” with the winning number “09”, “Blue BB” with the winning number “10”, “Red RB” with the winning number “11”, and the winning number “ “Black RB” of “12”, “Common Bell + Blue BB” of winning number “13”, “Cherry RED + Red BB” of winning number “14”, “Cherry RED + Red RB” of winning number “15” Then, “Cherry BLK + Black BB” with the winning number “16” and “Cherry BLK + Black RB” with the winning number “17” are not determined as the winning combination.

  In the second embodiment, “watermelon A”, “watermelon B”, and “watermelon C” are collectively referred to as “watermelon”, and “cherry RED” and “cherry BLK” are collectively referred to as “cherry”. "

(Transition of gaming state in the second embodiment)
Here, the transition of the gaming state in the second embodiment will be described.

  In the second embodiment, when the current gaming state is the “first RT gaming state”, when “bonus” is won and “combination of symbols related to bonus” is displayed on the active line, The transition is made from the “first RT gaming state” to the “RB gaming state”.

  In the second embodiment, when the current gaming state is the “RB gaming state” and the “RB gaming state” is ended, the transition from the “RB gaming state” to the “second RT gaming state” is made. Is done.

  In the second embodiment, when the current gaming state is the “second RT gaming state” and the “combination of symbols related to cherry” is displayed on the active line, the “second RT gaming state” To “first RT gaming state”.

(State transition managed by the main control board in the second embodiment)
Here, the state transition managed by the main control board in the second embodiment will be described.

  The states managed by the main control board in the second embodiment are “normal state”, “bonus preparation state”, “BB state”, “RB state”, “ART state”, “ART bonus preparation state”, “ There are “8” states, “BB state during ART” and “RB state during ART”.

(Normal state)
The “normal state” is a disadvantageous state for the player. Here, in the second embodiment, in the “normal state”, when “bonus” is determined as the winning combination by the internal lottery process, a control to shift from the “normal state” to the “bonus preparation state” is performed. .

(Bonus ready state)
The “bonus preparation state” is a state that is transferred when “bonus” is determined as a winning combination by the internal lottery process. Specifically, in the “bonus preparation state”, the left stop button at a timing at which “a combination of symbols related to the bonus” corresponding to the “bonus” determined by the internal lottery process can be displayed on the active line. 11. By operating the middle stop button 12 and the right stop button 13, the “combination of symbols related to the bonus” can be displayed on the active line. Further, in the “bonus preparation state”, when “the combination of symbols related to BB” is displayed on the active line, the control to shift from the “bonus preparation state” to the “BB state” is performed. When the “combination of symbols” is displayed on the active line, control for shifting from the “bonus preparation state” to the “RB state” is performed.

(BB state)
The “BB state” is a state in which, in the “bonus preparation state”, the transition is made based on the “combination of symbols related to BB” being displayed on the active line. Here, in the second embodiment, the “BB state” is a lottery for determining whether or not to shift to the “ART state” based on the winning combination determined by the internal lottery process. In addition, in the “BB state”, when it is not determined to shift to the “ART state”, the control to shift to the “normal state” is performed after the “BB state” ends, and the “ART state” is set. When it is determined to shift, control to shift to the “ART state” is performed after the “BB state” ends.

  In the “BB state”, when “watermelon” is determined as a winning combination by the internal lottery process, information for displaying “a combination of symbols related to watermelon” on the active line is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 31. And the speaker 33. In the “BB state”, when “Cherry” is determined as the winning combination by the internal lottery process, information for displaying “Combination of symbols related to cherry” on the active line is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 31. And the speaker 33.

(RB state)
The “RB state” is a state that is shifted when “combination of symbols related to RB” is displayed on the active line in the “bonus preparation state”. Here, in the second embodiment, in the “RB state”, a lottery for determining whether or not to shift to the “ART state” is performed based on the winning combination determined by the internal lottery process. In addition, in the “RB state”, when it is not determined to shift to the “ART state”, the control to shift to the “normal state” is performed after the “RB state” ends, and the “ART state” is set. When it is determined to shift, control to shift to the “ART state” is performed after the “RB state” ends.

  In the “RB state”, when “watermelon” is determined as a winning combination by the internal lottery process described later, information for displaying “a combination of symbols related to watermelon” on the effective line is displayed on the liquid crystal display. Notification is given by the device 31 and the speaker 33. In the “RB state”, when “Cherry” is determined as the winning combination by the internal lottery process, information for displaying “Combination of symbols related to cherry” on the active line is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 31. And the speaker 33.

(ART state)
“ART state” is a state in which, when “watermelon” is won by internal lottery processing, information for displaying “a combination of symbols related to watermelon” on the active line in an advantageous manner for the player is notified. It is. Accordingly, the player operates the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 according to the notified information to display “the combination of symbols related to watermelon” on the active line. Can do. Further, in the “ART state”, when “bonus” is determined as the winning combination by the internal lottery process, a control to shift from the “ART state” to the “ART bonus preparation state” is performed. Further, in the “ART state”, when the value of the ART state game number counter provided in the main RAM 303 becomes “0”, the control to shift from the “ART state” to the “normal state” is performed. In the “ART state”, when “Cherry”, “Watermelon”, and “Common Bell” are determined as the winning combination by the internal lottery process, the number of games that can be played in the “ART state” is added. A lottery of no is performed.

  In the “ART state”, when “watermelon” is determined as the winning combination by the internal lottery process, information for displaying “a combination of symbols related to watermelon” is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 31. Or the speaker 33, so that the player can obtain medals.

  In the “ART state”, when “cherry” is determined as the winning combination by the internal lottery process, information for not displaying “a combination of symbols related to cherry” on the active line is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 31. Therefore, it is possible to avoid falling from the “second RT gaming state” to the “first RT gaming state”.

(Bonus ready state during ART)
The “ART bonus preparation state” is a state in which a transition is made when “bonus” is won in the “ART state”. Specifically, in the “artial bonus preparation state”, in the same way as the “bonus preparation state”, the “combination of bonus-related symbols” corresponding to the “bonus” determined by the internal lottery process is placed on the active line. By operating the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 at a timing at which they can be displayed, the “combination of symbols related to the bonus” can be displayed on the active line. In addition, in the “art bonus preparation state”, when “a combination of symbols related to BB” is displayed on the active line, control is performed to shift from the “art bonus preparation state” to the “art BB state”. In other words, when “a combination of symbols related to RB” is displayed on the active line, a control is performed to shift from the “ART bonus preparation state” to the “ART RB state”.

(BB state during ART)
The “BB state during ART” is a state in which “the combination of symbols related to BB” is displayed on the active line in the “BONUS PREPARATION state during ART”. Here, in the second embodiment, in the “ART state BB state”, a lottery for determining whether or not to add the number of games that can be played in the “ART state” is performed based on the winning combination determined by the internal lottery process. Is called. In addition, when the BB is completed in the “art BB state”, control is performed to shift from the “art BB state” to the “ART state”.

  In “ART during BB state”, when “watermelon” is determined as the winning combination by the internal lottery process, information for displaying “a combination of symbols related to watermelon” on the active line is displayed on the liquid crystal display. Notification is given by the device 31 and the speaker 33. In the “art BB state”, when “cherry” is determined as the winning combination by the internal lottery process, information for displaying “a combination of symbols related to cherry” on the active line is displayed on the liquid crystal display. Notification is given by the device 31 and the speaker 33.

(RB state during ART)
The “RB state during ART” is a state in which “the combination of symbols related to RB” is displayed on the active line in the “BONUS PREPARATION state during ART”. Here, in the present embodiment, in the “art RB state”, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to add the number of games that can be played in the “ART state” based on the winning combination determined by the internal lottery process. . Thereby, the interest in the game in the “RB state during ART” is improved. Further, in the “RB state during ART”, when the RB ends, control is performed to shift from the “RB state during ART” to the “ART state”.

  In “RB state during ART”, when “Watermelon” is determined as the winning combination by the internal lottery process, the information for displaying “Combination of symbols related to watermelon” on the effective line is displayed on the liquid crystal display. Notification is given by the device 31 and the speaker 33. In “RB state during ART”, when “Cherry” is determined as the winning combination by the internal lottery process, information for displaying “Combination of symbols related to cherry” on the active line is displayed on the liquid crystal display. Notification is given by the device 31 and the speaker 33.

(Relationship between conditional device command and instruction information in the second embodiment)
Next, based on FIG. 72, the relationship between the conditional device command and the instruction information in the second embodiment will be described. 72 is a modified example of FIG. 17 in the first embodiment, and therefore, the description of the same part as FIG. 17 is omitted. The “instruction information” shown in the second embodiment is different from the “operation order” in the first embodiment, and is information indicating the content of “watermelon A” when “watermelon A” is won, for example. . That is, when “watermelon A” is won, “watermelon A” is transmitted from the main control board 300 to the sub control board 400 as the content indicated by the instruction information command, and the number of payouts managed in the main control board 300 is displayed. In the device 16, “02” corresponding to the symbol position of “symbol related to red seven” is displayed, and in the liquid crystal display device 31 managed by the sub control board 400 via the effect control board 500, the left reel In 18, a display that stops the “symbol related to red seven” on the active line is performed.

  The “instruction information command” shown in FIG. 72 is a command indicating winning combination information for displaying a combination of symbols related to a winning combination, and is transmitted from the main control board 300 to the sub control board 400. The winning combination information is information indicating specific contents such as “watermelon A”, “watermelon B”, and “watermelon C” for “watermelon”, and “cherry RED” for “cherry”. ”,“ Cherry BLK ”and the like indicating specific contents. For example, the sub-control board 400 refers to the content indicated by the received “instruction information command”, and which “watermelon” of “watermelon A”, “watermelon B”, and “watermelon C” is established. Also, which one of “Cherry RED” and “Cherry BLK” is established is notified using the liquid crystal display device 31, the LED 32, the speaker 33, and the like via the effect control board 500. .

(About sending conditional device commands)
As in the first embodiment, the conditional device command is divided into one that is transmitted with one winning combination for one winning number and one that is transmitted with one winning combination for a plurality of winning numbers. For example, in FIG. 72, the winning number “01”, the winning number “05” to the winning number “17” are assigned to one winning number in both the “normal state”, “ART bonus preparation state”, and “ART state”. Sent in the winning combination.

  On the other hand, the winning numbers “02” to “04” are transmitted in a single winning combination for a plurality of winning numbers for both “normal state”, “ART bonus preparation state”, and “ART state”. . For example, “Watermelon A” with a winning number “02”, “Watermelon B” with a winning number “03”, and “Watermelon C” with a winning number “04” are “Normal state”, “Bonus ready state during ART”, “ Both “ART state” and “watermelon A”, “watermelon B”, and “watermelon C” are transmitted as “watermelon” as a conditional device command.

  In the second embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the maximum value of medals that can be used in one game is “3”. In the second embodiment, when “a combination of symbols related to red watermelon”, “a combination of symbols related to black watermelon”, or “a combination of symbols related to blue watermelon” is displayed, “9” The medal is paid out. As described above, when the number of medals to be paid out when the combination of symbols related to winning is displayed is larger than the maximum value of medals that can be used in one game, the main control board 300 sends a sub-control board 400. The conditional device commands transmitted in this manner can be a group of commands. On the other hand, when “a combination of symbols related to red cherry” and “a combination of symbols related to black cherry” are displayed, “1” medals are paid out. In this way, when the number of medals to be paid out is smaller than the maximum value of medals that can be used in one game, the main control board 300 to the sub control board 400 The condition device commands transmitted to can be commands that are not grouped together. Therefore, for example, if the winning number “06” “the combination of symbols related to red cherry” or “the combination of symbols related to black cherry” is displayed, the number of medals to be paid out is defined as “4”. , “Cherry RED” and “Cherry BLK” are transmitted as a group of conditional device commands “Cherry”. In this way, the winning combination (for example, “Watermelon A”, “Watermelon B”, “Watermelon C”) having a large number of payouts, which is likely to be fraudulent, makes a comparison while combining the conditional device commands to improve security. The winning combination (for example, “Cherry RED”, “Cherry BLK”) with a small number of payouts that is not subject to fraud is not grouped with the conditional device commands, and the conditional device commands are grouped together for all winning combinations. It is possible to reduce the control burden.

(About sending instruction information commands)
In the instruction information command, the contents to be transmitted are defined in each of “normal state”, “ART bonus preparation state”, and “ART state”. For example, in the “normal state”, “no instruction” is transmitted as the contents indicated by the instruction information command for the winning numbers “01” to “17”. Further, in the case of “ART bonus preparation state” or “ART state”, if the winning number “02” is “Watermelon A”, “Watermelon A” is transmitted as the content indicated by the instruction information command. If it is “Watermelon B” with the winning number “03”, “Watermelon B” is transmitted as the content indicated by the instruction information command, and if “Watermelon C” with the winning number “04”, the content indicated by the instruction information command. If “Watermelon C” is transmitted and “Cherry RED” of the winning number “06” is transmitted, “Cherry RED” is transmitted as the content indicated by the instruction information command, and “Cherry BLK” of the winning number “07” is displayed. If so, “cherry BLK” is transmitted as the content indicated by the instruction information command, and “no instruction” is transmitted as the content indicated by the instruction information command for the other winning numbers that can be won. It is.

(Instruction production decision table)
Next, the instruction effect determination table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 73 is a modification of FIG. 18 in the first embodiment, and a description of the same parts as those in FIG. 18 is omitted.

  In FIG. 73A, if the winning number is “02” to the winning number “04”, “Watermelon”, “Direction C” is determined as the instruction effect at “86/256” and “85/256”. ”To determine“ effect D ”as the instruction effect, and“ 85/256 ”to determine“ effect E ”as the instruction effect. If the winning number is “05” “common bell”, “256/256” determines “effect F” as the instruction effect, and if the winning number “06” is “cherry RED”, “ At “256/256”, “effect G” is determined as the instruction effect, and “Cherry BLK” with the winning number “07” is determined, “effect H” is determined as the instruction effect at “256/256”. .

  On the other hand, in FIG. 73 (B), for “Watermelon A” with the winning number “02”, “Direction C” is determined as “Direction C” at “255/256”, and “1/256”. “Indication I” is determined as the instruction effect, and “Watermelon B” of the winning number “03” is determined, “Direction D” is determined as the instruction effect at “255/256” and “1/256”. Then, “Direction I” is determined as the instruction effect, and “Watermelon C” of the winning number “04” is determined, “Direction E” is determined as the instruction effect at “255/256”, and “1 / In “256”, “effect I” is determined as the instruction effect. In addition, “Production I” can be won in any of the winning numbers “02” to “04”. When “Production I” is selected, the symbol is stopped. A game of hitting a position can be executed. If the winning number is “05” “common bell”, “256/256” determines “effect F” as the instruction effect, and if the winning number “06” is “cherry RED”, “ At “256/256”, “effect G” is determined as the instruction effect, and “Cherry BLK” with the winning number “07” is determined, “effect H” is determined as the instruction effect at “256/256”. .

(Instruction information display LED data creation processing in the second embodiment)
Next, the instruction information display LED data creation process in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. Note that differences from the instruction information display LED data creation processing in the first embodiment are described, and descriptions of the same points as the instruction information display LED data creation processing in the first embodiment are omitted.

(Step S206-6-7)
In step S206-6-7, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the winning combination is a watermelon. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the winning combination is “watermelon” based on the value stored in the winning combination storing area provided in the main RAM 303. When it is determined that the winning combination is a watermelon (step S206-6-7 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S206-6-8, and when it is determined that the winning combination is not a watermelon. (Step S206-6-7 = No), the instruction information display LED data creation process subroutine in the second embodiment is terminated, and the process proceeds to Step S206-7 of the LED display process.

(Step S206-6-8)
In step S206-6-8, the main CPU 301 performs LED data creation processing for watermelon. Specifically, when “watermelon” is determined as the winning combination, the main CPU 301 notifies the operation timing of the left stop button 11 in order to display “a combination of symbols related to watermelon” on the active line. The process which creates LED data for watermelon for the purpose is performed. When the process of step S206-6-8 is completed, the subroutine of the instruction information display LED data creation process in the second embodiment is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S206-7 of the LED display process.

  Here, in the instruction information display LED data creation process, the main CPU 301 performs the internal lottery process when the state managed by the main control board 300 is other than the “normal state” (step S206-6-1 = No). Thus, a process of determining whether or not “watermelon” is determined as the winning combination is performed (step S206-6-7). When “watermelon” is determined as the winning combination (step S206-6-7 = Yes), the LED data creation process for watermelon is performed (step S206-6-8). In the port output process (step S208), the main CPU 301 performs a process of transmitting the watermelon LED data created in the watermelon LED data creation process (step S206-6-8) to the status board 100. .

  Then, the status board 100 controls the payout number display 16 based on the LED data for watermelon received from the main control board 300. Accordingly, the left stop button 11 and the middle stop button 12 aiming at any of the symbol combinations of “a combination of symbols related to red watermelon”, “a combination of symbols related to black watermelon”, and “a combination of symbols related to blue watermelon”. Whether or not the right stop button 13 should be operated is displayed on the payout number display 16.

  In this way, whether or not the combination of symbols related to winning is displayed on the active line according to the operation timing of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 like "watermelon". When a different winning combination is determined, the payout number display unit 16 notifies information related to the winning combination, for example, the operation timing of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13. . On the other hand, depending on the operation timing of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13, there is a winning combination other than the winning combination depending on whether or not a combination of symbols related to winning is displayed on the active line. If determined, the payout number display unit 16 does not notify the information related to the winning combination. Thereby, the control burden of the main control board 300 can be reduced.

  On the other hand, when “common bell” is determined as the winning combination in the internal lottery process, the main CPU 301 has not determined “watermelon” as the winning combination by the internal lottery process (step S206-6-6). 7 = No), the instruction information display LED data creation process in the second embodiment is terminated. Accordingly, the information relating to the winning combination is not displayed on the payout number display 16.

  Thus, in the second embodiment, the combination of symbols displayed on the active line is changed according to the operation timing of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13, such as “watermelon”. When a different winning combination is determined, the payout number display unit 16 notifies information related to the winning combination, for example, the operation timing of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13. . On the other hand, when a winning combination other than the winning combination having a different combination of symbols displayed on the active line is determined according to the operation timing of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13, The payout number display 16 does not notify the information related to the winning combination. Thereby, the control burden of the main control board 300 can be reduced.

  In the second embodiment, the combination of symbols related to the bell is on the active line regardless of the order in which the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 are operated. When the “common bell” to be displayed is determined as the winning combination, information relating to the winning combination is not displayed on the payout number display 16. Thereby, the control burden of the main control board 300 can be reduced.

  In this embodiment, it is determined whether or not the “common bell” is determined as the winning combination by determining whether or not the winning combination is “watermelon”. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Never happen. For example, a process of determining whether or not “common bell” is determined as a winning combination may be performed.

  In the internal lottery process, when “normal replay” is determined as the winning combination, the main CPU 301 has not determined “watermelon” as the winning combination by the internal lottery process (step S206-6-7). = No), the instruction information display LED data creation process is terminated. Accordingly, the information relating to the winning combination is not displayed on the payout number display 16.

  Thus, regardless of the order in which the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 are operated, the “combination of symbols related to general replay” is displayed on the active line, and RT When “normal replay” that does not involve the transition of the gaming state is determined as the winning combination, information relating to the winning combination is not displayed on the payout number display 16. Thereby, the control burden of the main control board 300 can be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not “normal replay” is determined as the winning combination by determining whether or not the winning combination is “watermelon”, but the present invention is not limited to this. Never happen. For example, a process for determining whether or not “normal replay” is determined as the winning combination may be performed.

  In the internal lottery process, if “Cherry RED” or “Cherry BLK” is determined as the winning combination, the main CPU 301 has not determined “Watermelon” as the winning combination by the internal lottery process ( In step S206-6-7 = No), the instruction information display LED data creation process is terminated. Accordingly, the information relating to the winning combination is not displayed on the payout number display 16.

  As described above, when the stop operation of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 is performed at a timing at which “a combination of symbols related to red cherry” can be displayed on the effective line, “red cherry” is displayed. When “cherry RED” capable of displaying “the combination of symbols related to” is determined as the winning combination, the information relating to the winning combination is not displayed on the payout number display 16. Thereby, the control burden of the main control board 300 can be reduced.

  In addition, when the stop operation of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 is performed at a timing at which “a combination of symbols related to red cherry” can be displayed on the effective line, When “cherry” capable of displaying “combination of symbols” is determined as a winning combination, information relating to the winning combination is not displayed on the payout number display 16. Thereby, the control burden of the main control board 300 can be reduced.

  In addition, when the stop operation of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 is performed at a timing at which “a combination of symbols related to black cherry” can be displayed on the effective line, When “Cherry BLK” capable of displaying “combination of symbols” is determined as a winning combination, information on the winning combination is not displayed on the payout number display 16. Thereby, the control burden of the main control board 300 can be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not “Cherry RED” or “Cherry BLK” is determined as the winning combination by determining whether or not the winning combination is “Watermelon”. However, it is not limited to this. For example, a process of determining whether “Cherry RED” or “Cherry BLK” is determined as a winning combination may be performed.

  In addition, when “common bell” that can display “a combination of symbols related to bell” is determined as a winning combination, or “cherry RED” that can display “a combination of symbols related to red cherry” is determined as a winning combination If “Cherry BLK” capable of displaying “Black cherry design combination” is determined as a winning combination, “Bell design combination”, “Red cherry design combination” The symbol combination displayed on the active line is displayed as “a symbol combination related to winning”, which is equal to or less than the number of inserted symbols, as in “a symbol combination related to black cherry”. In this case, information relating to the winning combination is not displayed on the payout number display 16. Thereby, the control burden of the main control board 300 can be reduced.

  In the internal lottery process, when “bonus” is determined as the winning combination, the main CPU 301 has not determined “watermelon” as the winning combination by the internal lottery process (step S206-6-7 = No), the instruction information display LED data creation process is terminated. Accordingly, the information relating to the winning combination is not displayed on the payout number display 16.

(Third embodiment)
Hereinafter, the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 75 and 76.

(Relationship between conditional device command and instruction information in the third embodiment)
First, based on FIG. 75, the relationship between the conditional device command and the instruction information in the third embodiment will be described. 75 is a modified example of FIG. 17 in the first embodiment, and therefore, the description of the portions overlapping with FIG. 17 is omitted.

(Regarding transmission of conditional device commands in the third embodiment)
For “replay during RT1”, if the state managed by the main control board 300 is “normal state”, a conditional device command indicating “replay during RT1” is transmitted. On the other hand, when the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “ART state”, the winning number “02” “Replay during RT1” is transmitted as a conditional device command indicating “Replay during RT1”, “Replay B during RT1” of the winning number “03” is transmitted as a conditional device command indicating “Replay B during RT1”, and “Replay C during RT1” of the winning number “04” is “Replay C during RT1”. “RT1 replay D” of the winning number “05” is transmitted as a conditional device command indicating “RT1 replay D”. That is, when the state managed by the main control board 300 is “normal state”, the winning number “02” “Replay during RT1”, the winning number “03” “Replaying during RT1”, and the winning number “ While “04 replay C in RT1” and “05 replay D in RT1” with the winning number “05” are collected (including all), the conditional device command “RT1 replay” is transmitted. When the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “ART state”, the “No Replay A during RT1” of the winning number “02” is selected by the conditional device command “Replay A during RT1” with the winning number “03”. “Replay B during RT1” is a conditional device command “Replay B during RT1”, and “Replay C during RT1” with a winning number “04” is “Replay C during RT1”. At Cormorant conditions apparatus command, "RT1 during the replay D" of the winning number "05", under the conditions apparatus command "RT1 in the replay D", and sent individually without collectively.

  Similarly, regarding the “replay during RT2”, when the state managed by the main control board 300 is “normal state”, while the condition device commands that collectively “replay during RT2” are transmitted, When the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “ART state”, the “No Replay A during RT2” of the winning number “06” is selected by the condition device command indicating “Replay during RT2”. “Replay B during RT2” of “07” is a conditional device command indicating “Replay B during RT2”, and “Replay C during RT2” of winning number “08” is a conditional device command indicating “Replay C during RT2” And send them individually without putting them together.

  Similarly, regarding “replay during RT3”, if the state managed by the main control board 300 is “normal state”, a condition device command including a group of “replay during RT3” is transmitted, whereas When the state managed by the control board 300 is the “ART state”, the winning number “09” “Replay A during RT3” is determined by a conditional device command indicating “Replay A during RT3” with a winning number “10”. "Replay B during RT3" is a conditional device command indicating "Replay B during RT3", and "Replay C during RT3" with a winning number "11" is a conditional device command indicating "Replay C during RT3". And send them individually without putting them together.

  In addition, regarding the “push order bell”, when the states managed by the main control board 300 are “normal state” and “bonus preparation state during ART”, conditional device commands including the “push order bell” as a group are displayed. In contrast, when the state managed by the main control board 300 is “ART state”, the “push order bell A” of the winning number “12” is a condition device command indicating “push order bell A”. The “push order bell B” of the winning number “13” is a condition device command indicating “push order bell B”, and the “push order bell C” of the win number “14” is “push order bell C”. In the condition device command indicating “Push Order Bell D” for the winning number “15”, the “Push Order Bell E” for the winning number “16” is set in the condition device command indicating “Push Order Bell D”. , Condition device piece showing “push order bell E” Donite, it is sent individually without collectively. The transmission of the conditional device command is not limited to the “push order replay” shown in FIGS. 17 and 75, but is applied to “watermelon” and “cherry” shown in FIG. 72 in the second embodiment. May be. For example, when winning the “watermelon A” of the winning number “02”, if it is “normal state”, a group of conditional device commands “watermelon” is transmitted, and if it is “ART state”, “ You may make it transmit the separate condition apparatus command which is not put together as "watermelon A". The condition device command may also be transmitted for “cherry” with the same configuration.

  With this configuration, in particular, when the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “normal state”, the conditional device command is illegally analyzed, and even if an attempt is made to acquire a medal illegally, the conditional device Since the command has a grouped content, it is difficult to grasp which winning combination corresponding to which winning number is specifically won. For example, even if the condition device command is illegally analyzed and the content “push order bell” is acquired, it is possible to grasp which of “push order bell A” to “push order bell E” is won. It is difficult to obtain medals illegally. On the other hand, when the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “ART state”, the operation order of the stop button is informed, so the conditional device command is analyzed and the medal is obtained illegally. This eliminates the need to send conditional device commands together.

(Information setting process in the third embodiment)
Next, based on FIG. 76, the information setting process performed by the process of step S110 of FIG. 21 will be described. FIG. 76 is a diagram showing a subroutine of information setting processing. In addition, while explaining about a different point from the information setting process in 1st Embodiment, description of the same point as the information setting process in 1st Embodiment is abbreviate | omitted.

(Step S110-14)
In step S110-14, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the winning combination is any one of “push order replay”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the winning combination is any one of “push order replay” based on the value stored in the winning combination storing area provided in the main RAM 303. I do. If it is determined that the winning combination is any of “push order replay” (step S110-14 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S110-15, and the winning combination is “push order replay”. If it is determined that neither of them is satisfied (step S110-14 = No), the process proceeds to step S110-18.

(Step S110-15)
In step S110-15, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “normal state”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “normal state” based on the value stored in the state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Perform the process. If it is determined that the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “normal state” (step S110-15 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S110-17 and is managed by the main control board 300. When it is determined that the state to be performed is not the “normal state” (step S110-15 = No), the process proceeds to step S110-16.

(Step S110-16)
In step S110-16, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting (individual) conditional device commands corresponding to the selected push order replay. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting the conditional device command in the effect transmission data storage area provided in the main RAM 303 in order to transmit the conditional device command to the sub-control board 400. . That is, the conditional device command set in step S110-16 is individual information that is not collected as described in FIG. For example, when the winning number “02” “Replay during RT1” is won, “Replay during RT1” is set in the process as the conditional device command. Then, when the process of step S110-16 is completed, the process proceeds to step S110-10.

(Step S110-17)
In step S110-17, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting a set of “push order replay” as a conditional device command. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting the conditional device command in the effect transmission data storage area provided in the main RAM 303 in order to transmit the conditional device command to the sub-control board 400. . That is, the conditional device command set in step S110-17 is a set of information as described in FIG. For example, if the winning number “02” “Replay during RT1” is won, “Replay during RT1” is set as the conditional device command in this process. When the winning number “06” “Replay during RT2” is won, “Replay during RT2” is set as the conditional device command in this processing. If the winning number “09” “Replay during RT3” is won, “Replay during RT3” is set as the conditional device command in this process. Then, when the process of step S110-17 ends, the process proceeds to step S110-10.

(Step S110-18)
In step S110-18, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the winning combination is any of “push order bells”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the winning combination is any of “push order bells” based on the value stored in the winning combination storing area provided in the main RAM 303. I do. If it is determined that the winning combination is “push order bell” (step S110-18 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S110-19, and the winning combination is “push order bell”. If it is determined that neither of them is satisfied (step S110-18 = No), the process proceeds to step S110-22.

(Step S110-19)
In step S110-19, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “normal state”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “normal state” based on the value stored in the state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Perform the process. If it is determined that the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “normal state” (step S110-19 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S110-21 and is managed by the main control board 300. If it is determined that the state to be performed is not the “normal state” (step S110-19 = No), the process proceeds to step S110-20.

(Step S110-20)
In step S110-20, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting (individual) conditional device commands corresponding to the selected push order bell. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting the conditional device command in the effect transmission data storage area provided in the main RAM 303 in order to transmit the conditional device command to the sub-control board 400. . That is, the conditional device command set in step S110-20 is individual information that is not collected as described in FIG. For example, if the winning number “12” “push order bell A” is won, “push order bell A” is set as the conditional device command in this process. Then, when the process of step S110-20 is completed, the process proceeds to step S110-10.

(Step S110-21)
In step S <b> 110-21, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a group of “push order bells” as a conditional device command. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting the conditional device command in the effect transmission data storage area provided in the main RAM 303 in order to transmit the conditional device command to the sub-control board 400. . That is, the conditional device command set in step S110-21 is a set of information as described in FIG. For example, if the winning number “12” “push order bell A” is won, “push order bell” is set as the conditional device command in this process. When the winning number “13” “push order bell B” is won, “push order bell” is set as the conditional device command in this process. When the winning number “14” “push order bell C” is won, “push order bell” is set as the conditional device command in this process. If the winning number “15” “push order bell D” is won, “push order bell” is set as the conditional device command in this process. If the winning number “16” “push order bell E” is won, “push order bell” is set as the conditional device command in this process. Then, when the process of step S110-21 ends, the process proceeds to step S110-10.

(Step S110-22)
In step S110-22, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a corresponding condition device command. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting the conditional device command in the effect transmission data storage area provided in the main RAM 303 in order to transmit the conditional device command to the sub-control board 400. . That is, conditional device commands corresponding to winning combinations other than “push order replay” and “push order bell” are set in this process. For example, when the value stored in the winning combination storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is a value corresponding to “normal replay”, “normal replay” is set as the conditional device command. Then, when the process of step S110-22 ends, the process proceeds to step S110-10.

  Thus, according to the present invention, when the state managed by the main control board 300 is the ART state, when the “push order bell” is determined by the internal lottery process, the information related to the winning combination, For example, a process of displaying the operation order of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 on the payout number display 16 is performed. Then, the sub control board 400 performs processing for displaying the operation order of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 on the liquid crystal display device 31. On the other hand, when the state managed by the main control board 300 is the ART state and the “common bell” is determined by the internal lottery process, information related to the winning combination is displayed on the payout number display 16. Do not process. Then, the sub-control board 400 performs a process of displaying information related to the winning combination. Thus, when the “common bell” is determined by the internal lottery process, the processing load on the main control board 300 can be reduced by the amount of control that is not displayed on the payout number display 16.

  In the present embodiment, the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 constitute a reel of the present invention.

  In the present embodiment, the start lever 10 and the start switch 10sw constitute the start operation detection means of the present invention.

  In the present embodiment, the main control board 300 that executes the internal lottery process in step S107 constitutes the winning combination determining means of the present invention.

  In the present embodiment, the left stepping motor 151, the middle stepping motor 152, and the right stepping motor 153 constitute reel rotation control means of the present invention.

  In the present embodiment, the left stop button 11, the left stop switch 11sw, the middle stop button 12, the middle stop switch 12sw, the right stop button 13, and the right stop switch 13sw constitute stop operation detection means of the present invention.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the main control board 300 that executes the processing during reel rotation in step S113 constitutes the stop control means of the present invention.

  In the present embodiment, the main control board 300 that executes the display determination process in step S115 constitutes the determination unit of the present invention.

  In the present embodiment, the hopper 202, the hopper sensor 202s, and the main control board 300 that executes the medal payout process in step S116 constitute a game value giving means of the present invention.

  In the present embodiment, the main control board 300 that controls the ART state constitutes the specific state control means of the present invention.

  In the present embodiment, the main control board 300 constitutes the main control means of the present invention.

  In this embodiment, the sub control board 400 constitutes a sub control means of the present invention.

  In the present embodiment, the payout number display unit 16 constitutes the display means of the present invention.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, the liquid crystal display device 31, LED32, and the speaker 33 comprise the production | presentation means of this invention.

  Examples of “predetermined symbol combinations” include “watermelon symbol combinations”, “bell symbol combinations”, “cherry symbol combinations”, and “chance-related symbol combinations”. Although "combination" was illustrated, it is not limited to this, For example, the combination of another symbol may be sufficient.

  Further, although “medal” is illustrated as an example of “game value”, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be a coin, a game ball, game point data, a token, or the like.

  Further, although “push order bell” is illustrated as an example of “predetermined winning combination”, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be other winning combinations, for example.

  In addition, as an example of the “predetermined symbol combination”, “the symbol combination related to the fourth bell” is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, “the symbol combination related to the first bell” , “A combination of symbols relating to the second bell”, or “a combination of symbols relating to the third bell”.

  Further, although the “ART state” is illustrated as an example of the “specific state”, the present invention is not limited to this. ”,“ Bonus preparation state during ART ”,“ BB state during ART ”, and“ RB state during ART ”.

  In the present embodiment, a gaming machine used for a spinning machine (slot machine) has been described. However, the gaming machine may be used for a pachinko gaming machine, a sparrow ball gaming machine, or an arrangement ball gaming machine.

1 gaming machine 2 cabinet 3 front door 4 hinge mechanism 5 key hole 6 medal slot 7 BET button 7sw BET switch 8 MAXBET button 8sw MAXBET switch 9 settlement button 9sw settlement switch 10 start lever 10sw start switch 11 left stop button 11sw left stop switch 12 Intermediate stop button 12sw Intermediate stop switch 13 Right stop button 13sw Right stop switch 14 Selector 14s Selector sensor 15 Stored number display 16 Discharged number display 16a 1st segment 16b 2nd segment 16c 3rd segment 16d 4th segment 16e 5th segment 16f 6th segment 16g 7th segment 16h 8th segment 16i 9th segment 16j 10th segment 16k 11th segment 16l 12th segment 16m 13th segment 16n 14th segment 16o 15th segment 16p 16th segment 17 s Door open / close sensor 18 Left reel 19 Middle reel 20 Right reel 21 Production button 21 s Production button sensor 22 Cross key 22 s Cross key sensor 23 Display window 24 Receptacle unit 25 Medal payout port 26 First BET lamp 27 Second BET lamp 28 Third BET lamp 30 External Centralized terminal board 31 Liquid crystal display 32 LED
33 Speaker 100 Status board 150 Reel control board 151 Left stepping motor 152 Middle stepping motor 153 Right stepping motor 154s Left reel sensor 155s Middle reel sensor 156s Right reel sensor 200 Power board 201 Power button 201sw Power switch 202 Hopper 202s Hopper sensor 300 Main control Board 301 Main CPU
302 Main ROM
303 Main RAM
304 Main random number generator 400 Sub control board 401 Sub CPU
402 Sub ROM
403 Sub RAM
404 Sub-random number generator 500 Production control board 501 Production control CPU
502 Production control ROM
503 Production control RAM
504 CGROM
505 Sound source IC
506 Sound source ROM
507 VDP

Claims (1)

A plurality of reels having a plurality of symbols arranged on the circumferential surface;
Start operation detecting means for detecting a start operation by the player;
A winning combination determining means for determining a winning combination based on the detection of the start operation by the start operation detecting means;
Reel rotation control means for performing control to rotate the plurality of reels based on the start operation detected by the start operation detection means;
Stop operation detecting means provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels, and detecting a stop operation by a player;
Stop control means for stopping the reel being rotated by the reel rotation control means based on the detection of the stop operation by the stop operation detecting means and the winning combination determined by the winning combination determining means. When,
Determination means for determining whether or not a predetermined symbol combination is displayed as a result of stopping all of the plurality of reels by the stop control means;
Based on the determination that the predetermined symbol combination is displayed by the determination means, game value giving means for giving a game value;
When the predetermined winning combination is determined by the winning combination determining means, specific state control means for controlling a specific state in which information for displaying a combination of predetermined symbols corresponding to the predetermined winning combination is notified When,
Main control means for controlling the game,
Sub-control means for controlling the production;
Display means capable of displaying information related to the winning combination determined by the winning combination determining means and information related to the gaming value, controlled by the main control means;
Production means that is controlled by the sub-control means and used when executing the production;
With
The main control means includes
At least in the case where the specific state is controlled by the specific state control means, the start operation is detected by the start operation detecting means when the predetermined winning combination is determined by the winning combination determining means. And after the plurality of reels start to rotate by the control of the reel rotation control means, the information related to the predetermined winning combination is displayed on the display means.
When all of the plurality of reels are stopped, the information related to the predetermined winning combination is hidden, and the determination unit determines that the combination of symbols related to the predetermined winning combination is displayed. Based on the above, performing control to display information related to the gaming value of the predetermined winning combination on the display means,
A winning combination different from the predetermined winning combination, and a combination of specific symbols is displayed regardless of the timing at which the stop operation is detected by the stop operation detecting means and the order in which the stop operations are detected. In addition, when the specific winning combination to which the gaming value is given by the gaming value granting unit is determined, the control related to displaying the information on the specific winning combination on the display unit is not performed
The sub-control means includes
When the specific winning combination is determined, the gaming machine is controlled to execute the effect by controlling the effect means.